Home

Altivar 32 - Schneider Electric

Contents

1. 295 Control block CHANGER s roisam ib al i ee aie Qc 295 Fault detection codes displayed on the remote display terminal 296 ERES 297 Chapter 12 Index of Furictlons 299 Chapter 13 Index of Parameter 301 51 28692 03 2010 5 Table of Contents 1 28692 03 2010 Safety Information Safety Information Important Information NOTICE PLEASE NOTE Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install operate or maintain it The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not followed safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death A DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards Obey all A WARNING WARNING indicates a potential
2. Code SELEY aL ES dLLB CEE YT dLLB dL dL dLb dLd ee 90 1 dU ld dO 90 15 dP I ems dP dPS dP E dP 1 dP 1 Bcc deta arts drC dct dr CE d5F 95 d5P EBU Fg S1A28692 03 2010 304 CUSTOMER SETTING 331 39 V3 1 NI NOE NEN UB 2 el NOIL VOINnWWOO PNE 774 En LN3W39 VNVW LNV ibl ua 3 S42018 NOIL NN 4 144 ise 112 2 071 549 SLNdLNO SLNdNII 22P g S 335 2 103 1NOO YOLON Sh men ea 135 zig soNILL3S 5 LLYVLS lt 747 uoneanBiyuoo oen 514 2l ISONILLAS ANOLOVA eg DNIMOLINOW 1 472 Index of Parameter Codes Code F5 FHb FAd FAd 2 FAd3 FAdY FbELd FbdF Foren 5 FL FLU FLUE FLUE 305 FLr FLU Fn Fng Fad
3. ES LAZA 45 S1A28692 03 2010 307 Index of Parameter Codes CUSTOMER SETTING 4371 101 NOILLVOINnIWWO2 114 LN3W39 VNVW 11 1 65 e NI N LO tO u qd S42018 NOILONNAl 732 aNvWWOO ite 124 71 549 SLNdLNO 1 103 1NOO YOLOW 135 59 1138 01 5 LLYVLS lt 747 oen 5 74 ISONILLAS ANOLOVA DNIMOLINOW 1 4372 Code 2 LAC LbH 1 Lb LbF EEr LECE Lads LES LEE LFA LFF LFL3 Log LE ped LLE Lab LOI l LU IH LH 15 Loc LP LPe 145 LE Lun I nuue nogo nuu 0 05 1 28692 03 2010 308 CUSTOMER SETTING 331 NR NI
4. Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting rd gl Preset ref PID 3 See page 200 2 600 Preset PID reference See page 200 Preset ref PID 4 See page 200 2 900 Preset PID reference See page 200 51 28692 03 2010 87 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting lbr Brake release FW 0 to 1 36 In 1 0 0A Brake release current threshold for lifting or forward movement See page 179 el Brake release Rev 0 to 1 36 In 1 0 0A Brake release current threshold for lowering or reverse movement See page 179 Brake Release time 0 5 00 s 08 Brake release time delay See page 179 Brake release freq Auto FU E 0 Auto 0 to 10 Hz See page 180 AUE O Auto A L E O Nominal value Brake engage freq Auto Auto A UE 0 0 to 10 Hz Brake engage frequency threshold See page 180 Brake engage delay 0 to 5 00 s Os A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL Modify the Brake engage delay for horizontal movement only otherwise the control of the load can be lost Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Time delay before request to engage brake See page 180 DIESE Brake engag
5. Reel of yarn Synchronization EL Winding motor Ferd Main shaft pa Thread guide motor The Counter wobble function is used in certain applications to obtain a constant yarn tension when the Traverse control function is producing considerable variations in speed on the yarn guide motor Traverse freq high H and Traverse Freq low L see Traverse freq high H page 227 Two motors must be used one master and one slave The master controls the speed of the yarn guide the slave controls the winding speed The function assigns the slave a speed profile which is in antiphase to that of the master This means that synchronization is required using one of the master s logic outputs and one of the slave s logic inputs 51 28692 03 2010 225 Configuration Mode ConF Run command on master and slave Traverse control command on master and slave 1 Yarn guide motor trH speed trL master drive tSY SnC synchronization t Winding motor speed slave drive trL Connection of synchronization I O Master drive Slave drive SnCl The starting conditions for the function are Base speeds reached on both drives Yarn control
6. BN us Ubr UF re H PH U THE 7 1 Uns 1 1 5 56 us USL USP USE 317 51 28692 03 2010 Index of Parameter Codes 318 1 28692 03 2010 ATV32 programming manual S1A28692 01 03 2010
7. gt D m 4 1 C3 a ESC ESC Q ENT 51 28692 03 2010 43 Monitoring Mode MOn Menu Code Name Description Unit HD 1 2 MONITORING A IU Image input AIV1 96 First virtual Al value This parameter is read only It enables you to display the speed reference applied to the motor 18 Frequency ref Hz Frequency reference before ramp signed value This parameter is read only It enables you to display the speed reference applied to the motor regardless of which reference channel has been selected Il fp ge HMI Frequency ref Hz HMI frequency reference signed value This parameter only appears if the function has been enabled It is used to change the speed reference from the remote control ENT does not have to be pressed to enable a change of reference Multiplying coeff 96 Multiply frequency variable Multiplying coefficient can be accessed if Multiplier ref 75 2 7 A 3 page 154 has been assigned dE rm Output frequency Hz Estimated motor frequency signed value E EUS Pulse in work freq Hz Measured frequency of the Pulse input input see page 246 LU Ln Mains voltage V Main voltage from DC bus Line voltage b
8. the assignment conditions on page 138 51 28692 03 2010 113 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting IE TEE CONFIGURATION assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions that are assigned to input LI1 in order to check for multiple assignments n E B Not assigned Un Run U n Run Enable F r d Forward F d Forward operation 5 Reverse 5 Reverse operation P 5 Ramp switching P 5 Ramp switching JOG 409 J 0G Jog operation USP Speed U 5 P speed d 5P speed d 5 P speed 2 preset speeds P 5 2 2 Preset speeds P 5 4 4 preset speeds P 5 4 Preset speeds P5H 8 preset speeds P 5 B 8 Preset speeds r FC Ref 2 switching Reference switching n SE Freewheel stop 5 E Freewheel stop dL I DC injection dC 1 Injection DC stop F SE Fast stop F 5 E Fast stop F L O Forced local L O Forced local mode SF Fault reset 5 F Fault reset E UL Auto tuning L L Auto tuning 5 Ref memo 5 Save reference FL 1 F L 1 Motor fluxing P A U Auto manual P A LU auto manu P 5 integral reset P 15 Integral shunting P r 2 preset PID ref P 2 2 Preset PI D references P r
9. FAL 95 Fr Fr Ib Frg Fr 51 28692 03 2010 Index of Parameter Codes Code CUSTOMER SETTING a T p 8 E 2 z E A x z 9 g E B B9 e E b 5 6 s 8 a gt Q z E lt 9 lt 5 48 5 22 len go jeu Ec 6 O 520 z 05 lt wt OY Jar amp 74 94 55 103 156 FSE 158 FEd 89 234 FEO 90 253 FEL 90 252 69 GFS 69 GSP 271 1 102 H Ir 103 190 75 77 229 HSPE 78 229 H5PF3 78 229 HSPY 78 229 IAG I 145 NALS 145 145 145 IHUS 145 145 IROTT 145 IADB 145 145 IH IU 145 1 268 268 IHd3 268 268 lbr 88 179 Ibr H 185 98 81 159 254 lal 81 160 254 IER 144 IE He 144 ILU3 144 ILU 144 ILOS 144 ILUE 144 306 1 28692 03 2010 Index of Parameter Codes Code CUSTOMER SETTING 1 1 SPEED REFERENCE EF INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG foe FAULT MANAGEMENT APPLICATION FUNCT
10. S1A28692 03 2010 85 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting ENG PID prop gain 0 01 to 100 1 Proportional gain See page 197 r ILG PID integral gain 0 01 to 100 1 Integral gain See page 197 ip tel li PID derivative gain 0 00 to 100 0 Derivative gain See page 197 PrP PID ramp 0 to 99 9 s 0s PID acceleration deceleration ramp defined to go from Min PID reference to Max PID reference IP 2 and vice versa See page 197 Min PID output 599 to 599 Hz 0 Hz Minimum value of regulator output in Hz See page 197 Max PID output 0 to 599 Hz 60 Hz Maximum value of regulator output in Hz See page 197 TUE Min fbk alarm See page 197 2 100 Minimum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback See page 197 PAH Max fbk alarm See page 198 2 1 000 Maximum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback See page 198 IgE m PID error Alarm 0 to 65 535 2 100 Regulator error monitoring threshold See page 198 Bre Speed input 901 1 to 10096 10096 Multiplying coefficient for predictive speed input See page 198 ip dE Preset ref PID 2 See page 200 2 300 Preset PID reference See page 200 86 S1A28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF
11. pde pe EP PPJI ePIC rP3d PPJ PPY rPH eRe rPr rP5 r rr5 PSR r5H5 r5d ror PSL POEL rir rUn 5 5 5 5 5105 5 06 S5 q 5 IUH S LBS 1 28692 03 2010 312 Index of Parameter Codes Code CUSTOMER SETTING 5 E e 9 me 2 z x z g g v B 9 je X E L 8 s B E rz 8 s 2 2 ae ep eo 5 er av eT TAN Sc 11 ac Ou ac jst 520 lear joo Zu ZED 15 wt OY Jar 5110 215 5111 215 5112 215 5113 215 5114 215 5115 215 520 215 5202 215 5203 215 5204 215 5205 215 5206 215 5207 215 5208 215 5209 215 52 10 215 5211 215 52 12 215 5213 215 S214 215 5215 215 5301 216 5302 216 5303 216 5304 216 5305 216 53065 216 5307 216 5308 216 5309 216 53 10 216 5311 216 53 12 216 5313 216 5314 216 5315 216 153 153 SAL 212 SAr 212 SHE 240 SCL 190 51 28692 03 2010 313 Index of Para
12. 232 dbL 5 L5H dLdH AG AGG Val EFA USA UPA si m fae R1 Assignment No drive flt F L E No 5 Not assigned No drive flt F L Drive fault detection status relay normally energized and de energized if there is a trip Drv running U n Drive running Freq Th attain Frequency threshold attained Freq threshold 2 page 89 HSP attain L A High speed attained attained Current threshold attained Current threshold d page 89 Freq ref att 5 Frequency reference attained Th mot att 5 A Motor 1 thermal state attained PID error al P E E PID error alarm PID fdbk al PID feedback alarm Freq Th 2 attain 2 Frequency threshold 2 attained Freq threshold 2 d page 89 Th att 2 Drive thermal state attained Pro Undload L L A Underload alarm Ovid P Alrm Overload alarm Rope slack 5 d H Rope slack see Rope slack config 5 4 parameter page 190 High tq att H A Motor torque overshooting high threshold High torque thd H page 89 Low tq E E L A Motor torque undershooting low threshold Low torque thd L page 89 Forward N F d Motor in forward rotation Reverse 5 Motor in reverse rotation Th mot2
13. menu bL E Brk control b L Brake contactor control LLC Input cont L L Line contactor control OCC Output cont Output contactor control E b D End reel End of reel traverse control function E 5 4 Sync wobble 5 Counter wobble synchronization dL 0 DC charging d O DC bus precharging contactor control OLO I 0101 UL O I Function blocks Logical Output 01 HL 0110 UL 10 Function blocks Logical Output 10 LH Id LO1 delay time 0 to 60 000 ms 1 0 ms The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt F L Brk control 5 L Output cont and Input cont L L E assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true OARS LO1 active at 11 5 Configuration of the operating logic POS 1 O 5 State 1 when the information is true n E LE 0 n E D State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 05 cannot be modified for the No drive flt F L Brk control b L and Input cont L L assignments 124 51 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LO IH 101 holding time 0 to 9 999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt F L Brk control 5 L and Input cont L L assignments and rema
14. Analog input 12 AI2 12 Analog input 13 AIS 13 Analog input LEE HMI Assignment of the reference and command to the graphic display terminal or remote display terminal Reference HMI Frequency ref L F r page 44 Command RUN STOP FWD REV keys RP P 1 Pulse input OA01 9 H 1 Function blocks Analog Output 01 c HH OA10 OAR 10 Function blocks Analog Output 10 fF IL uie Time out forc local 0 1 to 30s 10 0 s 0 1 to 30 s This parameter can be accessed if Forced local assign L O is not set to No O Time delay before communication monitoring is resumed on leaving forced local mode These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 51 28692 03 2010 259 Configuration Mode ConF Access Level See Access Level L A page 262 260 1 28692 03 2010 Interface ItF Interface ItF What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Access Level LAC 262 Language LnG 264 Monitoring Configuration MCF 265 Display configuration dCF 269 51 28692 03 2010 261 Interface
15. Rated motor speed 5 and Rated motor power P r Motor 1 Cosinus Phi O 5 are correctly configured before starting auto tuning When one or more of these parameters have been changed after auto tuning has been performed Auto tuning U n will return No action 5 and the procedure will have to be repeated Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Auto tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated If a freewheel stop or fast stop function has been assigned to a logic input this input must be set to 1 active at 0 Auto tuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands which will be taken into account after the auto tuning sequence If auto tuning detects a fault the drive displays No action O and depending on the configuration of Autotune fault mgt n L page 249 may switch to Auto tuning n F fault mode Auto tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds Do not interrupt the process Wait for the display to change to No action D Note Motor thermal state has a big influence on tune result Make the tune with the motor stopped and cold To redo a tune of the motor wait that it is completely stopped and cold Set first Auto tuning U n to Erase tune L then redo the motor tuning The use of the motor tuning without doing a Erase tune L first is used to ge
16. COMMUNICATION continued l MODBUS NETWORK Add Modbus Address OFF OF F to247 OFF OFF OFF 1 to 247 Modbus add C OFF OF F to247 OFF OFF OFF 1 to 247 Ie Eyre Modbus baud rate 19 2 Kbps 19 2 48 96 192 384 kbps on the integrated display terminal 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds on the graphic display terminal Modbus format 8 E 1 BE 1 801 8E1 8n1 8n2 Modbus time out 0 1to 30s 10 05 0 1 to 30s EHI 1 com stat rOtO Modbus no reception no transmission communication idle 701 1 Modbus no reception transmission 710 Modbus reception no transmission IE 14 1 Modbus reception and transmission These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 51 28692 03 2010 257 Configuration Mode ConF BLUETOOTH Code LON lais In Name Description COMMUNICATION continued BLUETOOTH Adjustment range Factory setting PAn Device Name Device name set with graphic display terminal Note The length is up to 16 a
17. Transmit PDO3 4 Fourth frame of the transmit PDO3 IE c nm CANopen MAP continued CANopen image Only accessible via graphic display terminal 5 Canopen state Drive NMT State of the CANopen slave Boot b 00 E Bootup 5 Stopped 5 Stopped Operation Operational POPE Pre op P E Pre Operational Number of TX PDO Number of transmit PDO nbr Number of RX PDO Number of receive PDO Error code CANopen error register from 1 to 5 I Error Counter Controller Rx error counter not memorized at power off EEC TXerror counter Controller Tx error counter not memorized at power off 51 28692 03 2010 55 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Name Description Unit T alg 1 2 MONITORING continued MONIT PI PID management Visible if PID feedback ass F is not set to No a D pd Internal PID ref Q Internal PID reference As a process value iP dps PID error PID error value PIE IP PID feedback PID feedback value ip PIE PID reference PID setpoint value via graphic display terminal PID Output Hz PID output value with limitation Ia 1 2 MONITORING continued IPE e MONIT POWER TIME APH Consumption Wh kWh M
18. speed command Com card n Communication card if inserted PC tool 5 PC software IE qe dn Hz Frequency ref Frequency reference before ramp 50 1 28692 03 2010 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Name Description Unit EA ETA state word DRIVECOM status word Possible values in CiA402 profile separate or not separate mode Bit 0 Ready to switch on awaiting power section line supply Bit 1 Switched on ready Bit 2 Operation enabled running Bit 3 Fault 7 0 No fault 1 Fault Bit 4 Voltage enabled power section line supply present 0 Power section line supply absent 1 Power section line supply present When the drive is powered by the power section only this bit is always at 1 Bit 5 Quick stop Emergency stop Bit 6 Switched on disabled power section line supply locked Bit 7 Alarm 0 No alarm 1 Alarm Bit 8 Reserved 0 Bit 9 Remote command or reference via the network 0 Command or reference via the graphic display terminal or the remote display terminal 1 Command or reference via the network Bit 10 Target reference reached 0 The reference is not reached 1 The reference has been reached When the drive is in speed mode this is the speed reference Bit 11 Internal limit active reference outside limits 7 0 The reference is within the limits 1 The reference is not within the limits When the drive is
19. Thermal alarm stop function allow to set a custom alarm thermal level for the drive or the motor When one of these levels is reached the drive trips in freewheel stop No O Function inactive in this case the following parameters cannot be accessed Yes 8 E 5 Freewheel stop on drive or motor thermal alarm EHA therm state al 0 to 11896 100 Thermal state threshold of the drive tripping the deferred stop Q Motor therm level 0 to 11896 100 Thermal state threshold of the motor tripping the deferred stop Motor2 therm level 0 to 11896 100 Thermal state threshold of the motor 2 tripping the deferred stop FL EE Ekda Q F Motor3 therm level 0 to 118 100 Thermal state threshold of the motor 3 tripping the deferred stop FAULT MANAGEMENT continued EXTERNAL FAULT External fault ass No 1 If the assigned bit is at 0 there is no external fault If the assigned bit is at 1 there is an external fault Logic can be configured via External fault config 1 if a logic input has been assigned No 5 5 Function inactive LI1 L 1 Logical input LI1 the assignment conditions on page 138 IL E 5 LU H IL External fault config Active high H 5 Parameter can be accessed if the external fault has been assigned to a
20. and 2 wire type page 112 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop L F F fallback spd L Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 r L 5 Spd L 5 The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred as long as the detected fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop Stop on ramp F SE Fast stop 5 E Fast stop dL I DC injection d 7 DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 150 Gril fL Modbus fault mgt Freewheel 5 E 5 A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL If Modbus fault management Modbus fault mgt 51 L is setto Ignore O communication control will be inhibited For safety reasons inhibiting the communication interruption detection should be restricted to the debug phase or to special applications Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication interruption with integrated Modbus n Ignore 2 Detected fault ignored YE 5 Freewheel 5 Freewheel stop SEE STT 5 E E Stop accord
21. fault O F L Motor overheating detected error from PTCL standard product Input phase loss Main input 1 phase loss PEFL probe P E F L PTCL detected error OC or SC SAF F Safety fault 5 A F F Safety function trip SCF I Motor short circuit 5 C F 1 Motor short circuit hard detection SC F 3 Ground short circuit 5 F 3 Direct ground short circuit trip hard detection SCF 4 short circuit 5 F IGBT short circuit hard detection SCF 5 Motor short circuit 5 5 Load short circuit during Igon load sequence hard detection SLF I Modbus com 5L F 1 Modbus local serial communication interruption 51 51 PC Software communication interruption 51 com 51 3 Remote terminal communication interruption 5 OF Overspeed 5 Overspeed 5 FF Speed fdback loss 5 Speed feedback loss 5r Torque time out 5 Torque regulation time out 5 SF Torque current lim 5 5 Torque current limitation detected fault E JF IGBT overheat JF IGBT overheating E nF Auto tuning n Tune detected fault UL F Pr Underload L L Torque underload USF Undervoltage U 5 Undervoltage fu Drive state HMI Status of the detected fault record 1 E U n Auto tuning Auto tuning dL b In DC inject d 5 Injection braking dH Ready d
22. 1 Function blocks Analog Input 01 IH 10 10 H Function blocks Analog Input 10 lel di dif Al1 Type Voltage 101 10 U Voltage 100 Positive voltage input negative values are interpreted as zero the input is unidirectional U IL min value 0 to 10 0 V OV voltage scaling parameter of 0 U IH I max value 0 to 10 0 V 10 0 V voltage scaling parameter of 100 lal dh WIE AM filter 0 to 10 00 s Os Interference filtering A IIL AM range 0 100 05 POS 0 100 P 5 Positive logical n E G 100 5 Positive and negative logical lal fl ile Interm point X 0 to 100 0 Input delinearization point coordinate Percentage of the physical input signal 0 corresponds to min value IL 100 corresponds to Al1 max value U 1 A 115 Interm point Y 0 to 10096 096 Output delinearization point coordinate frequency reference Percentage of the internal frequency reference corresponding to the Interm point X IE percentage of physical input signal EE ES INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG continued 2 CONFIGURATION Al2 assignment Identical to assignment A page 120 2 Voltage o 100 180 Voltage HL 0 10V U min value 0 to 10 0 V OV Al2 voltage scaling parameter of 0 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode Con
23. FL Alarm groups Current impacted alarm group numbers Group of alarms could be user defined in INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG O page 112 No alarm group impacted 1 1 Alarm group 1 2 2 Alarm group 2 12 2 Alarm group 1 and 2 3 3 Alarm group 1 3 3 Alarm group 1 and 3 23 23 Alarm group 2 and 3 123 123 Alarm group 1 2 and 3 ALARMS List of current alarms If an alarm is present v appears on the graphic display terminal jie ie ib USA IE T5 Ts iP sl EE ES ie ESA UPA FLA EHA AL 1 ALe ALJ HEE PFA ARA SISA E JH ULA OLA ie eligi E EHA dLdH iP Stik del No alarm n DAL PTCL alarm PECL External fault E UnderV U 5 attained Freq Th attain A Freq Th 2 attain F 2 A Freq ref att 5 A Th mot att E 5 Th mot2 att E 5 2 Th mot3 att E 5 3 Underv prev UP A HSP attain F L AI C drv E HA Alarm group 1 AL 1 Alarm group 2 A 5 2 Alarm group 3 AG 3 PID error al P E E PID fdbk al P F A Al 4 20mA 3 Lim 5 5A Th drv att E A d IGBT alarm E JA Brake R al 4 Underload Proc Al UL A Overload Proc OL A Rope slack alarm 5 dA High torque
24. i jam Ai zo a 2B i E E ow Ou 20 g jeu qu joe 2 Za et E 4 OY Jar 17 156 172 198 ACC 15 17 155 161 258 Hdd 257 46 120 AL KE 46 HIIE 121 HIIF 46 121 ALES 120 A IIE 120 Atef 46 120 A 46 A ICE 121 2 46 121 A 125 121 120 A 13A 47 121 A dE 4T TIE 121 AIFF 47 121 H 121 1825 121 1 121 122 196 A IU I 40 44 ALGr 57 257 Ag AT 129 IL 47 HU IF 47 129 51 28692 03 2010 301 Index of Parameter Codes Code CUSTOMER SETTING 1 1 SPEED REFERENCE rEF FAULT MANAGEMENT APPLICATION FUNCT FLE FUNCTION BLOCKS Macro configuration FB FACTORY SETTINGS CFG 1 2 MONITORING COMMUNICATION MOTOR CONTROL DII SIMPLY START dr E 5 3 INTERFACE SETTINGS SEE COMMAND CEL gt INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Bg HU IE X N Ko AGH N REEL I HPH N Ko ASHI ASE 1 ASE 101 175 HEr 234 AUE 96 fou J I ES N Ko k AU IA 121 AUCA 122 bE I 179 bdLU bEd bEn bEE bFr 14 92 b
25. input activated Synchronization signal present Note The Quick step High 8 5 H and Quick step Low 5 5 L parameters should generally be kept at 0 226 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FUn APPLICATION FUNCT continued Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 148 Yarn control n 0 The Traverse control cycle starts when the assigned input or bit changes to 1 and stops when it changes to 0 n a O Function inactive thereby helping to prevent access to other parameters Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 138 I ip ni Traverse freq high 0 to 10 Hz 4Hz Traverse frequency high 1 E ne ik Traverse Freq Low 0 to 10 Hz 4Hz Traverse frequency low 1 Quick step High 0 to Traverse freq high E H 0 Hz Quick step high 1 151 Quick step Low 0 to Traverse Freq Low 0 Hz Quick step low 1 fe Traverse ctrl accel 0 1 to 999 9 s 4s Acceleration traverse control Traverse ctrl decel 0 1 to 999 9 s 4s Deceleration traverse control Reel time 0 to 9 999 min 0 min Reel execution time
26. 2nd level of standstill DC injection current This parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection A d is not No D See page 162 tL d0 2 DC inj time 2 0 to 30s 0s CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Long periods of DC injection braking can cause overheating and damage the motor Protect the motor by avoiding long periods of DC injection braking Q Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage 2nd standstill injection time This parameter be accessed if Auto DC injection A dL is set to Yes 5 See page 162 SFr Switching freq 2 to 16 kHz 4 0 kHz CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE ATV32eeeeM2 ratings if the RFI filters are disconnected operation on an IT system the drive s switching Q frequency must not exceed 4 kHz Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Switching frequency setting See page 106 Adjustment range The maximum value is limited to 4 kHz if Motor surge limit 5 U L parameter page 107 is configured Note In the event of excessive temperature rise the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and reset it once the temperature returns to normal iE qq Current Limitation 0 to 1 5 In 1 1 5 In 1 CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR AND THE DRIVE Check that the motor will withstand this current partic
27. I 10utput phase loss 1 Motor 1 phase loss Bout ph loss Motor 3 phases loss Mains overvoltage 0 5 Oversupply detected fault PTC fault O E F L Motor overheating detected error from PTCL standard product Input phase loss Main input 1 phase loss LI6 PTC probe F L PTCL detected error OC or SC SAF F Safety fault 5 A F Safety function trip SCF I Motor short circuit 5 F 1 Motor short circuit hard detection 5 3 Ground short circuit 5 F 3 Direct ground short circuit trip hard detection 5 E F 4 IGBT short circuit 5 IGBT short circuit hard detection SCF 5 Motor short circuit 5 5 Load short circuit during Igon load sequence hard detection SLF I Modbus com 5L F Modbus local serial communication interruption 51 51 PC Software communication interruption 51 51 3 Remote terminal communication interruption 5 OF Overspeed 5 Overspeed 5 PF Speed fdback loss 5 Speed feedback loss 5 F Torque time out 5 Torque regulation time out 5 SF Torque current lim 5 5 Torque current limitation detected fault E JF IGBT overheat IGBT overheating E nF Auto tuning n Tune detected fault UL F Pr Underload Fit L L Torque underload USF Undervoltage U 5 Undervol
28. Ignore O Detected fault ignored Freewheel 5 Freewheel stop Ramp stop Stop on ramp Fast stop F 5 E Fast stop FEU Q 1 Overload T B Rest 0 to 6 min 0 min This parameter cannot be accessed if Ovld Proces Mngmt 0 d L is set to Ignore 2 Minimum time permitted between an overload being detected and any automatic restart In order to allow an automatic restart the value of Max restart time A page 234 must exceed this parameter by at least one minute LITER FAULT MANAGEMENT continued IL Ii FALLBACK SPEED Fallback speed 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz Selection of the fallback speed 51 28692 03 2010 253 Configuration Mode ConF Q 1 Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Pil ie FAULT MANAGEMENT continued FSE RAMP DIVIDER malit p Ramp divider 0 to 10 4 The ramp that is enabled Deceleration 9 or Deceleration 2 2 is then divided by this coefficient when stop requests are sent Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time Q 1 3 MEE FAULT MANAGEMENT continued DC INJECTION DC inject level 1 0 1 to 1 41 In 2 0 64 In 2 k CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment da
29. Interference filtering cutoff time of the low filter 46 1 28692 03 2010 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Name Description Unit IA ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE continued Analog input functions A IJE AI3 V customer image Value of analog input 3 A 13A assignment functions assignment If no functions have been assigned No 2 is displayed Following parameters are visible on the graphic display terminal by pressing the ENT key on the parameter Identical to assignment H page 46 LrL3 min value mA Current scaling parameter of 096 LrH3 max value mA Current scaling parameter of 100 A I3F AIS filter 5 Interference filtering cutoff time of the low filter IOM VO MAP continued ADOR ANALOG OUTPUTS IMAGE Analog output functions Following parameters are visible on the graphic display terminal by pressing the ENT key on the parameter ADO IE AO1C 1 customer image Value of analog output 1 1 AO1 assignment AO1 functions assignment If no functions have been assigned No D is displayed Identical to AO1 assignment page 129 UOL 1 AO1 min Output V Voltage scaling parameter of 0 Can be accessed if AO1 Type is set to Voltage O U UOH 1 AO1 max Output V Voltage scaling parameter of 100 Can be accessed
30. N N NI 19 S42018 112 2 0 1 549 SLNdLNO 1 P 30101 e N 335 59 1138 01 5 LLYVLS 757 oen 5 74 ISONILLAS ANOLOVA DNIMOLINOW 1 4372 Code 5516 S Ed SEF 5 5 Skr SEE SUL EHI E Heg BAZ EH ERH BAL Ee E BE Ebr ELE Ed EE 1 beled E dn EdS BEL 1 EFE EFr EHd ELd 315 51 28692 03 2010 Index of Parameter Codes CUSTOMER SETTING 4371 UB 3 NOILVOINnIWWOO 114 11 1 co 241 al al NI lt NIN al al lt NIN 234 ET 257 NI N o N N N N N N U94 S42018 NOIL NN 4 NI 112 2 o71 549 SLNdLNO 1 P 103 1NOO Y
31. also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming To change the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2 s 51 28692 03 2010 115 Configuration Mode ConF Configuration of analog inputs and Pulse input The minimum and maximum input values in volts mA etc are converted to 96 in order to adapt the references to the application Minimum and maximum input values The minimum value corresponds to a reference of 096 and the maximum value to a reference of 10096 The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value Reference A 100 or pulse input 1 f 1 1 1 Current or voltage 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 Min value Max value 20 mA or ErLxor Er Hx or 10V or ULxorP IL UHxor PFr 20 00 kHz Reference 4 10096 Current or voltage or pulse input 0 Max value Min value 20 mA or Hx or ErLxor 10 V or PFr ULxorP IL 20 00 kHz For bidirectional inputs the min and max are relative to the absolute value for example 2 to 8 V 116 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Range output values For analog inputs only This parameter is used to configure the reference range to 0 210096 or 100 100 in order to obtain a bidirectional output from a unidirectiona
32. 1 28692 03 2010 Overview Description of the HMI Functions of the Display and the Keys Schneider Electric 1 The ESC key is used for menu navigation backward and parameters adjustment cancel 2 The Jog dial is used for menu navigation up or down and parameters adjustment increase decrease value or element choice It can be used as Virtual analogic input 1 for drive frequency reference 3 The ENT key push on the Jog dial is used for menu navigation forward and parameters adjustment validate REF mode selected E F E Dot used to display parameter value 1 10 unit m MON mode selected NDO n Current display is parameter value CONF mode selected O n Current display is parameter unit gt Dot used to display parameter value 1 100 unit Normal display with no fault code displayed and no startup Displays the parameter selected in the 1 2 MONITORING menu default Frequency H In Initialization sequence only on remote display terminal EUN AutoTuning dt b Injection braking r dH Drive ready n5Et Freewheel stop control e CL I Current limit F5t Faststop e FLU Fluxing function is activated nL F Control is powered on but the DC bus is not loaded CEL Controlled st
33. 9 Motor torque between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque 5E 9 Sign torque 5 9 Signed motor torque between 3 and 3 times the rated motor torque The sign corresponds to the motor mode and the sign to the generator mode braking Or 5 sign ramp 5 Signed ramp output between Max frequency r and Max frequency F DOP 5 PID ref 0 P 5 PID regulator reference between Min PID reference P 1 and Max PID reference P IP 2 PID feedbk PID regulator feedback between Min PID feedback P F and Max PID feedback P IF 2 PID error PID regulator error between 5 and 5 of PID feedback P F 2 Min PID feedback PID output 1 PID regulator output between Low speed L 5 and High speed H 5 Mot power P r Motor power between 0 and 2 5 times Rated motor power n P U OF Motor volt U Voltage applied to the motor between 0 and Rated motor volt U n 5 E Hr Mot thermal H r Motor thermal state between 0 and 200 of the rated thermal state E Hr 2 Mot therm2 Hr 2 Motor thermal state 2 between 0 and 200 of the rated thermal state EHr J Mot therm3 H r 3 Motor thermal state 3 between 0 and 200 of the rated thermal state E Hd Drv thermal Drive thermal state between 0 and 200 of the rated thermal state E 9L Torq
34. E D Bidirectional input Example On a 4 20 mA input 4 mA corresponds to reference 100 12 mA corresponds to reference 0 20 mA corresponds to reference 100956 Since AI3 is in physical terms a bidirectional input the 100 5 E 5 configuration must only be used if the signal applied is unidirectional A bidirectional signal is not compatible with a bidirectional configuration ALIJE Interm point X 0 to 100 096 Input delinearization point coordinate Percentage of the physical input signal 0 corresponds to Min value L 3 if the range is 0 100 AI3 max value H 3 AI3 min value 096 corresponds to ifthe range is 100 100 3 100 corresponds to AI3 max value H 3 A Interm point Y 0 to 100 096 Output delinearization point coordinate frequency reference Percentage of the internal frequency reference corresponding to the AI3 Interm point X percentage of physical input signal INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG continued VIRTUAL AI1 AU AIV1 assignment Virtual analog input 1 via the jog dial available on the front side of the product Identical to assignment A page 120 51 28692 03 2010 121 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory se
35. Functions on speed references Functions Page Applications o 8 o 5 x E o 5 S 8 5 9 9 I I Differential bipolar reference 116 Ei B B Reference delinearization magnifying glass effect 119 Ej El Frequency control input 139 B Reference switching 152 Reference summing 153 Reference subtraction 153 Reference multiplication 153 EH Adjustable profile ramp 155 Jog operation 163 Preset speeds 165 El speed speed using single action pushbuttons 169 1 step speed speed using double action pushbuttons 169 Ej 2 steps speed around a reference 172 B E Save reference 123 Bg 20 1 28692 03 2010 Overview Application Specific functions Functions Page Applications Se g 5 x 9 S 8 5 9 e I I Fast stop 158 Brake control 176 B Load measurement 184 High speed hoisting 186 Rope slack 189 PID regulator 192 Motor generator torque limit 201 E Load sharing 109 B B Line contactor control 205 BH Output contactor control 208 Bi Positioning by limit switches or sensors 209 B Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch 211 Parameter switching 214 E B B gl Motor or configuration switching 217 B Traverse control 222 St
36. IAd4 Q Word 4 add select Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the lt lt and gt gt F2 and F3 keys and rotating the 0 jog dial FAdY Q LUE 5 IG n5L Format word 4 Format of word 4 Hex HE Signed 5 5 Unsigned 5 5 5 Then it will be possible to view the selected words in the COMMUNICATION MAP submenu of the 1 2 MONITORING menu Example Term 35 0Hz 80 0A COMMUNICATION MAP F230 Hex Hex Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 268 1 28692 03 2010 Interface ItF Display configuration dCF This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal It can be used to customize parameters or a menu and to access parameters RDY Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU ENT 2 IDENTIFICATION Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A 3 INTERFACE 3 1 ACCESS LEVEL 3 2 LANGUAGE 3 3 MONITORING CONFIG 3 4 DISPLAY CONFIG USER PARAMETERS 3 INTERFACE 4 OPEN SAVE AS 5 PASSWORD Code Quick Code lt lt gt gt Quick USER PARAMETERS Customization of 1 to 15 parameters MY MENU Creation of a customized menu PARAMETER ACCESS Customization of the visibility and protection mechanisms of menus and parameters KEYPAD PARAMETERS Adjustment of the contrast and stand by mode of the graphic display terminal parameters stored in the terminal
37. Im 5 Program size Program file size Can be accessed if FB status F b 5 E is not set to Idle d L E bnU Prg format version Binary format version of the drive Can be accessed if FB status F b 5 E is not set to Idle d L IE 5 UJ Catalogue version Catalog version of the drive 51 28692 03 2010 49 Monitoring Mode MOn Code IE IHRE Name Description Unit 1 2 MONITORING continued COMMUNICATION MAP This menu is visible only on graphic display terminal except for COM SCANNER INPUT MAP 5 and COM SCAN MAP 0 5 menus IE 1 Ndb CAn MEE PES Command channel Active command channel Terminals E Terminals HMI 1 Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal Modbus 7 d b Integrated Modbus CANopen A n Integrated CANopen speed speed command Com card n E Communication card if inserted PC tool 5 PC software Ee Cmd value DRIVECOM command register value Profile C HE F is not set to profile 7 see page 139 Possible values in CiA402 profile separate or not separate mode Bit 0 Switch on Contactor command Bit 1 Disable voltage Authorization to supply AC power Bit 2 Quick stop Emergency stop Bit 3 Enable operation Run command Bit 4 to Bit 6 Reserved set to
38. Optimization parameter for transient overvoltages at the motor terminals This parameter can be accessed if Motor surge limit SUL is set to Yes 5 Set to 6 8 or 10 us according to the following table Note This parameter is useful for ATV32eeeN4 drives These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 51 28692 03 2010 107 Configuration Mode ConF The value of the Volt surge limit opt 5 parameter corresponds to the attenuation time of the cable used It is defined to help to prevent the superimposition of voltage wave reflections resulting from long cable lengths It limits overvoltages to twice the DC bus rated voltage The tables on the following page give examples of correspondence between the Volt surge limit opt 5 parameter and the length of the cable between the drive and the motor For longer cable lengths an output of the filter or a dV dt protection filter must be used For motors in parallel the sum of all the cable lengths must be taken into consideration Compare the length given in the table row corresponding to the power for one motor with that correspo
39. Transfer of a drive configuration to another one with graphic display terminal when the drive uses MULTIMOTORS CONFIG N NC function Let A be the source drive and B the drive addressed In this example switching is controlled by logic input 1 Connect graphic display terminal to the drive A 2 Put logic input LI 2 Configurations n and LI 3 Configurations 2 100 3 Download configuration O in a file of graphic display terminal example file 1 of the graphic display terminal 4 Put logic input LI 2 Configurations C n 1 to 1 and leave logic input LI 3 Configurations n F 2 to 0 5 Download configuration 1 in a file of graphic display terminal example file 2 of the graphic display terminal 6 Putlogic input LI 3 Configurations F 2 to 1 and leave logic input LI 2 Configurations n F to 1 7 Download configuration 2 in a file of graphic display terminal example file 3 of the graphic display terminal 8 Connect graphic display terminal to the drive B 9 Put logic input LI 2 Configurations E n F and LI 3 Configurations n F 2 to 0 10 Make a factory setting of the drive B 11 Download the configuration file 0 in the drive file 1 of graphic display terminal in this example 12 Put logic input LI 2 Configurations C n F to 1 and leave logic input LI Configurations F 2 to 0 13 Download the configuration file
40. page 77 2 18 16 Deceleration 0 00 to 6 000 s 2 3 0s Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq F 5 page 74 to 0 To have repeatability in ramps the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application See Deceleration E page 77 Low speed 0 to 599 Hz 0 Q Motor frequency at minimum reference can be set between 0 and High speed H 5 P See Low speed L 5 P page 77 High speed 0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz Motor frequency at maximum reference can be set between Low speed L 5 and Max frequency r The factory setting changes to 60 Hz if Standard mot freq b F r is set to 60Hz NEMA See High speed H 5 page 77 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate 2 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6 000 s according to Ramp increment r page 155 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped To change the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2 s 51 28692 03 2010 75
41. 1 28692 03 2010 Overview Application functions The tables on the following pages show the combinations of functions and applications in order to guide your selection The applications in these tables relate to the following machines in particular Hoisting cranes overhead cranes gantries vertical hoisting translation slewing lifting platforms Handling palletizers depalletizers conveyors roller tables Packing carton packers labeling machines Textiles weaving looms carding frames washing machines spinners drawing frames Wood automatic lathes saws milling Process Each machine has its own special features and the combinations listed here are neither mandatory nor exhaustive Some functions are designed specifically for a particular application In this case the application is identified by a tab in the margin on the relevant programming pages Motor control functions Functions Page Applications 2 R s 8 ratio 92 Sensorless flux vector control 92 El BH m 2 point vector control 92 B B Open loop synchronous motor 92 Output frequency up to 599 Hz 92 E Motor overvoltage limiting 107 DC bus connection see Installation manual iB Motor fluxing using a logic input 174 B E Switching frequency of up to 16 kHz 82 Auto tuning 5 51 28692 03 2010 19 Overview
42. 4 preset PID ref P 4 Preset references E LA Torque limitation L A Permanent torque limitation External fault E F External fault r CA Output contact A Downstream contactor feedback C nF I 2 config switching C n F 1 Configuration switching 1 L nF 2 3 config switching F 2 Configuration switching 2 CHA I 2 parameter sets HH 1 Parameter switching 1 3 parameter sets C H A 2 Parameter switching 2 ELE Activ Analog torque limitation L Torque limitation Activation analog input by a logic input LE 5 switching 5 Command channel switching Fault inhibition 5 H Fault inhibition PS 46 preset speeds P 5 E 16 preset speeds LL 2 Current limit 2 L 2 Current limitation switching L AF Stop FW limit sw L Limit attained forward L Ar Stop RV limit sw L A r Limit attained reverse b Ref 1B switching 5 Reference channel switching 1 to 1B E r E Traverse control Traverse control bL I Brake contact 1 Brake logic input contact 5HF Stop FW limit sw 5 H F Stop switch forward 5H r Stop RV limit sw 5 A r Stop switch reverse Slowdown forward d F Slowdown attained forward dHr Slowdown reverse d Slowdown attained reverse LL 5 Disable limit sw L 5 Limits switches clearing L E 5
43. D Note Motor thermal state has a big influence on tune result Make the tune with the motor stopped and cold redo a tune of the motor wait that it is completely stopped and cold Set first Auto tuning U n to Erase tune L then redo the motor tuning The use of the motor tuning without doing a Erase tune L first is used to get the thermal state estimation of the motor In any case the motor has to be stopped before performing a tune operation Cable length has an influence on the Tune result If the cabling is modified it is necessary to redo the tune operation No action O Auto tuning not in progress Do tune 5 Auto tuning is performed immediatly if possible then the parameter automatically changes to No action If the drive state does not allow the tune operation immediately the parameter changes to No O and the operation must be done again Erase tune L The motor parameters measured by the auto tuning function are reseted The default motor parameters values are used to control the motor Auto tuning status L 5 is set to Not done A b EUS Auto tuning state Not done A b for information only cannot be modified This parameter is not saved at drive power off It shows the Autotuning status since last power on A b Not done A 5 Autotune is not done P E nd Pending F E Autotune has been reque
44. Error code 0 to 5 Read only parameter cannot be modified 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting COMMUNICATION continued Lbd COMMUNICATION CARD See the specific documentation for the card used FORCED LOCAL Forced local assign No o 1 A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL If the equipment switches to forced local mode virtual input used in the current configuration will remain fixed at the last value transmitted Do not use the virtual input and forced local mode in the same configuration Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Forced local assignment Forced local mode is active when the input is at state 1 Forced local assign L D is forced to No O if Profile C HL F is set to I O profile 7 page 139 n B O Function inactive L I L LH Logical input LI1 L IE LI6 L B Logical input LI6 LR I I I Logical input LA 12 LAI2 L A 12 Logical input Al2 OLO 1 0101 UL O 1 Function blocks Logical Output 01 HL OL10 UL 10 Function blocks Logical Output 10 P JL Forced local Ref No n 0 Forced local reference source assignment n 0 No 5 O Not assigned control via the terminals with zero reference 1
45. See High speed 4 H 5 P 4 page 229 IEH Mot therm current 0 2 to 1 5 In 2 According to drive rating Q Motor thermal protection current to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate See Mot therm current 75 IR compensation 0 to 20096 100 Q IR compensation See IR comprensation U F page 105 SISE Slip compensation 0 to 300 10096 Slip compensation See Slip compensation 5 L 105 Ele IR K speed loop filter 0 to 100 65 Speed filter coefficient See speed loop filter 5 page 105 SANE Speed time integral 1 to 65 535 ms 63 ms Speed loop integral time constant See Speed time integral 5 page 105 Speed prop gain 0 to 1 000 4096 Speed loop proportional gain See Speed prop 5 2 page 105 SPEU UF inertia comp 0 to 1 000 4096 Inertia factor See UF inertia comp 5 5 page 105 1 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6 000 s according to Ramp increment n r page 155 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual or on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming
46. Topic Page Error code 290 Clearing the detected fault 290 Fault detection codes which require a power reset after the detected fault is cleared 291 Fault detection codes that can be cleared with the automatic restart function after the cause has 293 disappeared Fault detection codes that are cleared as soon as their cause disappears 295 Option card changed or removed 295 Control block changed 295 Fault detection codes displayed on the remote display terminal 296 ADANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Read and understand the precautions in About the book chapter before performing any procedure in this section Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 51 28692 03 2010 289 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error code If the display does not light up check the power supply to the drive The assignment of the Fast stop or Freewheel functions will help to prevent the drive starting if the corresponding logic inputs are not powered up The ATV32 then displays Freewheel 5 in freewheel stop and Fast stop 5 in fast stop This is normal since these functions are active at zero so that the drive will be stopped if there is a wire break Check that the run command input is activated in accordance with the selected control mode 2 3 wire control and 2 wire type parameters page 73 If an input is assigned to the li
47. You must configure 2 4 and 8 speeds in order to obtain 8 speeds You must configure 2 4 8 and 16 speeds in order to obtain 16 speeds Combination table for preset speed inputs 16 speeds 8 speeds 4 speeds 2 speeds Speed reference LI PS16 LI PS8 LI PS4 LI PS2 0 0 0 0 Reference 1 0 0 0 1 SP2 0 0 1 0 SP3 0 0 1 1 SP4 0 1 0 0 SP5 0 1 0 1 SP6 0 1 1 0 SP7 0 1 1 1 SP8 1 0 0 0 SP9 1 0 0 1 SP10 1 0 1 0 SP11 1 0 1 1 SP12 1 1 0 0 SP13 1 1 0 1 SP14 1 1 1 0 SP15 1 1 1 1 SP16 1 See the diagram on page 132 Reference 1 SP1 51 28692 03 2010 165 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Flin APPLICATION FUNCT continued 55 PRESET SPEEDS Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 148 2 preset speeds No 5 0 n E No B Not assigned L I L LH 1 Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 138 4 preset speeds No 5 0 Identical to 2 preset speeds P 5 2 page 166 To obtain 4 speeds you must also configure 2 speeds 8 preset speeds No D Identical to 2 preset speeds P 5 2 page 166 To obtain 8 speeds you must also configure 2 and 4 speeds 16 preset speeds No n 0 Identical to 2 preset speeds P 5 2 page 166 To ob
48. to C115 E 1 15 With integrated Modbus regardless of configuration C201 1 to C210 C 2 With integrated in I O profile 0 configuration C211 to C215 C 2 15 With integrated CANopen regardless of configuration C301 30 to C310 E 3 With a communication card in I O profile 5 configuration C311 E 3 to C315 3 15 With a communication card regardless of configuration CD00 d O D to CD10 10 In I O profile 0 configuration CD11 I CD15 15 Regardless of configuration 0101 OL O to OL10 10 Regardless of configuration Note In I O profile 7 configuration L cannot be accessed and if 2 3 wire control page 73 is set to 3 wire 3 12 10 I Land 30 cannot be accessed either A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL Inactive communication channels are not monitored no trip in the event of a communication bus interruption Check that the commands and functions assigned to bits C101 to C315 will not pose a risk in the event of the interruption of the associated communication bus Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 138 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description FULL continued COMMAND Adjustment range Factory
49. 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF LINE CONTACTOR COMMAND The line contactor closes every time a run command forward or reverse is sent and opens after every stop as soon as the drive is locked For example if the stop mode is stop on ramp the contactor will open when the motor reaches zero speed Note The drive control power supply must be provided via an external 24 V source Example circuit Emergency stop q Run Reset E K11 1 kar uu uL ELI ied ds LU LU rrt RC 5 COM Lin 24 HUN K11 Forward reverse K10 24 V power supply Note The Run Reset key must be pressed once the Emergency stop key has been released Run command Forward d or Reverse 5 LO LO Line contactor ass L L Lin Drive lock L 5 CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR This function can only be used for a small number of consecutive operations with a cycle time longer than 60 s in order to avoid premature aging of the filter capacitor charging circuit Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage 51 28692 03 2010 205 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting ln APPLICATION FUNCT continued IL IL TE LINE CONTACTOR COMMAND IL 1L E Line co
50. 100 tA4 100 1 lar 1 Ramp increment 10 11 0 1 This parameter is valid for Acceleration Deceleration Acceleration 2 A 2 and Deceleration 2 d E 2 0 01 Ramp up to 99 99 seconds Q 1 ie 1 0 1 Ramp up to 999 9 seconds 1 Ramp up to 6 000 seconds IE Acceleration 0 00 to 6 000 s 2 3 08 Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq 5 page 74 To have repeatability in ramps the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application alls E Q 1 Deceleration 0 00 to 6 000 s 2 3 08 Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq 5 page 74 to 0 To have repeatability in ramps the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application EHI Q 1 Begin Acc round 0 to 100 10 Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as a of the Acceleration A or Acceleration 2 A 2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 This parameter can be accessed if the Ramp type is Customized 1 5 51 28692 03 2010 155 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting ERE End Acc round 0 to 100 10 Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a of t
51. 5 Counter wobble synchronization dE O DC charging d O DC bus precharging contactor control OLO 1 0101 HL HJ I Function blocks Logical Output 01 HL 0110 UL 10 Function blocks Logical Output 10 red R2 Delay time 0 to 60 000 ms 0 ms 1 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt Brk control b L Output cont and Input cont L L E assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true 25 R2 Active at 05 Configuration of the operating logic 1 P O 5 State 1 when the information is true n E LE 0 o E D State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 P O 5 cannot be modified for the No drive flt F L Brk control 5 L DC charging d E D and Input cont L L assignments iP Te In R2 Holding time 0 to 9 999 ms 0 ms The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt F L Brk control 5 L and Input cont L L assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG continued tL qur dp LO1 CONFIGURATION f LO1 assignment No 0 Identical to R1 Assignment page 123 with the addition of shown for information only as these selections can only be configured in the APPLICATION FUNCT
52. A 165 iB qz Mr ENIM a T 169 SPEED AROUND REFERENCE 22 25 122722229 cria Deua e naa adn 171 REFERENCE tae RD e 173 DA 174 2 176 EXTERNAL WEIGHT MEASUREMENT s sccsesccesestanedecansewetcevectcenereancerencencuessencnce 184 liciskcizizisirelyj ccc 186 PID REGULATOR CHE 192 PID PRESET REFERENCES sun D Dane 200 TORQUE LIMITATION Sante eere o ne asesor ie eR asm 201 2ND CURRENT LIMITATION o quan 204 252 25 205 OUTPUT CONTACTOR COMMAND esce Lorna b ducts en haee Did ue 207 POSITIONING BY SENSORS ege 209 PARAMETER SET SWITCHING 214 MULTIMOTORS MULTICONFIGURATIONS 217 AUTO TUNING BY LOGIC INPUT catene uus epa evo neun ena eaque 221 TRAVERSE CONTROE sec nac icut dese c echas sS ia een adieu dn sees 222 COMMUNICATION nnne nnn n nnne n
53. Drive ready n SE Freewheel 5 Freewheel stop control Un running Motor in steady state or run command present and zero reference ACC In accel AC Acceleration d E E In decel d E Deceleration EL I Current lim C L 1 Current limit F SE Fast stop F 5 E Fast stop F L U Mot fluxing L LU Fluxing function is activated nL P mains V a L P Control is powered on but the DC bus is not loaded CEL control stop L Controlled stop HI b Dec adapt r Adapted deceleration 5 Output cut 5 Stand by output cut USA UnderV al U 5 A Undervoltage alarm E E In mfg test TC indus mode activated SE autotest 5 E Self test in progress F H autotest err F H Self test detected error YE 5 Autotest OK 5 Self test OK eeprom test Self test Eeprom detected error FL E In fault F L E Product has detected a fault 55 SS1 active 5 5 Safety 551 level SL 5 SLS active 51 5 Safety SLS level STO active 5 Safety STO level state word DRIVECOM status register of detected fault record 1 same as ETA state word E page 51 IHE d ETI state word Extended status register of detected fault record 1 see the communication parameters file 51 28692 03 2010 59 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Name Desc
54. FLE Macro configuration FACTORY SETTINGS CFG 1 2 MONITORING FPE 5 COMMUNICATION MOTOR CONTROL CED SIMPLY START dr E 5 3 INTERFACE SETTINGS SEE COMMAND CEL FUNCTION BLOCKS FbI IL T Es r gt ILUB r gt ILD a r IN IL ID 45 In 243 Ey lar N In EP 202 N 45 74 Ird 75 x JFH J ko Ko Ko N Joo E o IGE E 4 JUL 163 ES JPF 90 A L IA 45 5 45 Led E A L 3H 45 L 3d 45 Lud qe LSA 45 ES E S LBH 45 zx LEd a gt e gt LAGE a r ae gt LADS xs is LACE gt 907 a r 45 les er LH Id
55. IF di F1 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz VIF profile setting This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type is set to V F 5pts UF 5 Ui U2 0 to 800 V according to rating 0 V VIF profile setting This parameter be accessed if Motor control type E is set to V F 5pts 5 E F2 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz VIF profile setting This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type is set to V F 5pts 5 51 28692 03 2010 105 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting U3 0 to 800 V according to rating 0 V VIF profile setting This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type is set to VIF 5pts UF 5 F3 F3 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz VIF profile setting This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type is set to VIF 5pts UF 5 UY U4 0 to 800 V according to rating 0 V VIF profile setting This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type is set to V F 5pts UF 5 FY F4 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz VIF profile setting This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type is set to V F 5pts UF 5 L5 U5 0 to 800 V according to rating 0 V VIF profile setting This parameter be accessed if Motor control type E is set to V F 5pts LF 5 F5 F5 0 to 599 Hz
56. Name Description Bit 10 Reference reached 7 0 The reference is not reached 1 The reference has been reached Bit 11 Reference outside limits 7 0 The reference is within the limits 7 1 The reference is not within the limits When the drive is in speed mode the limits are defined by LSP and HSP parameters Bit 12 and Bit 13 Reserved 0 Bit 14 Stop via STOP key 0 STOP key not pressed 7 1 Stop triggered by the STOP key on the graphic display terminal or the remote display terminal Bit 15 Direction of rotation 7 0 Forward rotation at output 1 Reverse rotation at output MODBUS NETWORK DIAG Modbus network diagnostic COM LED View of the Modbus Communication MICE Mb NET frames nb Modbus network frame counter Number of processed frames RIEC db Mb NET CRC errors Modbus network CRC error counter Number of CRC errors COMMUNICATION MAP continued DIAG BLUETOOTH Bluetooth network diagnostic re COM LED View of the Bluetooth Communication Led on integrated display Led Off The Bluetooth channel is deactivated Led fixed On The bluetooth channel is activated with active connection Led blinking The bluetooth channel is activated without active connection MICE Frame Nb Bluetooth frame counter Number of processed frames EX Sh ake CRC error Nb Bluetooth CRC error coun
57. O unless exterior stopping methods exist Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage This will be a freewheel stop If the active command channel is the graphic display terminal the stop will be performed according to the Type of stop 5 page 158 irrespective of the configuration of Stop Key priority 5 E n E n B HE 5 Yes 5 Gives priority to the STOP key on the graphic display terminal when the graphic display terminal is not enabled as the command channel IP Profile Not separ 5 125 A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION When I O profile 7 is deselected the drive automatically returns to the factory setting Check that the modification of the current configuration is compatible with the wiring diagram used Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 5 Not separ 5 Reference and command not separate Separate 5 P Separate reference and command This assignment cannot be accessed in I O profile 7 VO profile O profile 51 28692 03 2010 139 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting GES Cmd switching ch1 active d This parameter can be accessed if Profile F is set to Separate 5 or I O profile 2
58. be accessed if Movement type b 5 page 179 is set to Hoisting U E Q 1 HL E O Auto A U E O The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor calculated using the drive parameters 0 to 10 Hz Manual control When the reference direction is reversed this parameter can be used to avoid loss of torque and consequential release of load on transition to zero speed Parameter is not applicable if Engage at reversal 5 d Yes YE 5 Time to restart 0 00 to 15 00 s 0s Time between the end of a brake engage sequence and the start of a brake release sequence Q 1 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the SETTINGS 5 menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 51428692 03 2010 181 Configuration Mode ConF Brake control logic expert parameters Following parameters for brake logic sequence are accessible in expert mode only Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory set
59. 1 5 P see page 75 Following operation at LSP for a defined period a motor stop is requested automatically The motor will restart if the reference Q is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present See page 199 Note A value of 0 indicates an unlimited period of time Note If Low speed time out L 5 is not 0 Type of stop 5 E E page 158 is forced to Ramp stop only ifa ramp stop can be configured Ji fme Jog frequency 0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz Reference in jog operation See page 163 SIE Jog delay 0102 06 0 56 Anti repeat delay between 2 consecutive jog operations See page 164 Q 51 28692 03 2010 83 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Preset speed 2 0 to 599 Hz 10 Hz Preset speed 2 See Preset speed 2 5 P 2 page 166 5 F 8 Preset speed 3 0 to 599 Hz 15 Hz Preset speed 3 See Preset speed 3 5 P 3 page 166 seg Preset speed 4 0 to 599 Hz 20 Hz Preset speed 4 See Preset speed 4 5 P 4 page 166 SIES Preset speed 5 0 to 599 Hz 25 Hz Preset speed 5 See Preset speed 5 5 P 5 page 166 SFG Preset speed 6 0 to 599 Hz 30 Hz Preset speed 6 See Preset speed 6 5 P 5 page 166 Preset speed 7 0 to 599 Hz 35 Hz Pr
60. Axis q stator inductance in mH per phase On motors with smooth poles Autotune L d axis L 95 Autotun 0 to 655 35 mH 0 mH e L q axis L 9 5 Stator inductance L The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto tuning operation if it has been performed PHS 1 Syn EMF constant 0 to 6 553 5 mV rpm 0 mV rpm Synchronous motor EMF constant in mV per rpm peak voltage per phase PHS adjustment allows to reduce the current in operation without load Fr55 Nominal freq sync 10 to 800 Hz nSPS PPnS 60 Nominal motor frequency for synchronous motor in Hz unit Automatically updated according to Nom motor spdsync n 5 P 5 and Pole pairs P P n 5 data EE bandwith 0 to 100 Hz 25 Hz Bandwidth of the stator frequency SIRIG HF dump factor 0 to 200 10096 Dumping factor of the stator frequency Angle error Comp 0 to 50096 096 Error compensation of the angle position in high frequency mode It increases performances at low speed in generator and motor mode particularly for SPM motors HL E O Auto A U E DO The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor calculated using the drive parameters Fri HF injection freq 250 to 1 000 Hz 500 Hz Frequency of the high frequency injection signal It has an influence on the noise during an
61. Bit 9 Reserved Bit 10 Reserved Bit 11 Reserved Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 1 Motor speed measurement is not possible Bit 14 1 Motor ground short circuit detected Bit 15 1 Motor phase to phase short circuit detected 1 2 MONITORING continued MONIT FUN BLOCKS For more details on Function Blocks please refer to dedicated Function Blocks manual CHEL STETE INE rUn FB status Function Block Status Idle d L Idle state Check prog Check program state Stop 5 E STOP state Init Initialization state Run RUN state Err r Error state fe fen le fe InE b In EOAU HdL Fb l FB fault Status of the function blocks execution No 2 No fault detected Internal n E Internal fault detected Binary file 5 Binary fault detected Intern para n Internal parameter fault detected Para RW A r Parameter access fault detected Calculation A L Calculation fault detected AUX B AL TimeOut AUX task TO synch HB P P TimeOut in PRE POST task Bad ADLC A dL ADLC with bad parameter Input assign Input not configured FB IDENTIFICATION bUEr Program version Program user version Can be accessed if FB status F b 5 E is not set to Idle d L E
62. Code Description Factory settings values Page Standard mot freq 50Hz IEC 74 2 3 wire control 2 wire 2 2 wire control IS LEE Motor control type Standard 5 d U F 2 points Volts Hz without internal speed loop 92 Acceleration 3 0 seconds 15 Deceleration 3 0 seconds 79 LSP Low speed 0 Hz 75 High speed 50 Hz 15 Mot therm current Nominal motor current value depending on drive rating 75 Auto DC inj level 1 0 7 x nominal drive current for 0 5 seconds 81 SEF Switching freq 4 kHz 82 Furl Forward L11 L 1 Logic input LI1 113 ers Reverse assign 21 1 12 Logic input 112 113 Ref 1 channel A 1 Analog input 139 i R1 Assignment No drive flt F L E The contact opens when a fault is detected or 123 when the drive has been switched off brH Dec ramp adapt Yes 5 Function active automatic adaptation of deceleration 157 ramp HE Automatic restart O Function inactive 234 SEE Type of stop Ramp stop On ramp 158 CFG Macro configuration Start Stop 5 E 5 70 Note If you want to keep the drive presettings to a minimum select the macro configuration Macro configuration 5 Start stop 5 5 followed Restore config 5 Config CFG 1 For more information see page 70 Check whether the values above are compatible with the application 18
63. Hardware detected error IL F Option int link L Option internal link interruption Rating error 15 1 Unknown drive rating F 2 PWR Calib 5 F 2 Unknown or incompatible power board F 3 Int serial link amp F 3 Internal serial link communication interruption In F 4 Int Mfg area Invalid industrialization zone Internal option F Unknown or incompatible option board 58 1 28692 03 2010 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Name Description Unit F 9 Internal I measure n F 8 Current measurement circuit detected error Internal mains circuit n Input phase loss circuit detected error In F b Internal th sensor F b Thermal sensor detected error OC or SC In F E Internal CPU F E CPU detected fault ram flash task L E F Input contactor L Line contactor detected error L AI3 4 20mA loss L F F 3 4 20 mA loss Overbraking 0 b F Overbraking OC F Overcurrent Overcurrent Drive overheat Drive overheating OL C Proc Overload Fit O L Torque overload OL F Motor overload B L Motor overload OFF I 10utput phase loss 1 Motor 1 phase loss ph loss Motor 3 phases loss 5 F Mains overvoltage 0 5 Oversupply detected fault
64. Key RET Forced local Ref 2 switching Parameter T The black square represents the factory setting assignment 1 Ramps not active if the PID function is active in automatic mode Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Fr Ib for5EP Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Fr Ib for 5 ITI Terminals only accessible if F terminals 5 583 Terminals only Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card and speed Note Ref 1B channel F 4 and Ref 1B switching C b must be configured in the APPLICATION FUNCT u n menu 51 28692 03 2010 133 Configuration Mode ConF Command channel for Not separ 5 M configuration Reference and command not separate The command channel is determined by the reference channel Parameters F l FL OL are common to reference and command Example If the reference is Fr analog input at the terminals control is via logic input at the terminals LI nO 114 Al2 Ref 1 channel LCC RUN STOP FWD REV Graphic display terminal LI Profile FL UJ Forced local
65. L Unld Freq Thr Det d parameters The motor is in steady state when the offset between the frequency reference and motor frequency falls below the configurable threshold Hysteresis Freq Att 5 4 Torque as a of the rated torque Between zero frequency and the rated frequency the curve reflects the following equation 4 1 L Un L LIL X frequency rated frequency torque L UL The underload function is not active for frequencies below Freq Thr Det NU d 5 Frequency A relay or a logic output can be assigned to the signaling of this detected fault in the INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG O menu Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FAULT MANAGEMENT continued fli s PROCESS UNDERLOAD Unid Del Detect 0 to 100 s 0s Underload detection time delay A value of 0 deactivates the function and makes the other parameters inaccessible LUn Unid Thr Nom Speed 20 to 100 60 Underload threshold at rated motor frequency Rated motor freq F 5 page 74 as a of the rated motor torque Q Unid Thr 0 Speed 0 to Unld Thr Nom Speed 0 L Un Underload threshold at zero frequency as a of the rated motor torque Freq Thr Det 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz Minimum frequency underload detection threshold Sh
66. Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 78 S1A28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Parameter settings for speed loop filter 5 Speed prop gain 5 P 5 and Speed time integral 5 A WARNING with application LOSS OF CONTROL Bad parameter settings of the speed loop with High Inertia application may cause a Ramp non consistent Failure to follow these instructions will result in death serious injury or equipment damage The following parameters can be accessed if Motor control type E page 92 is set to SVC V U UC Sync mot 5 or Energy n L d General Case Setting for speed loop filter 5 0 The regulator is an IP type with filtering of the speed reference for applications requiring flexibility and stability hoisting or high inertia for example Speed prop gain 5 P 5 affects excessive speed Speed time integral 5 affects the passband and response time Initial response lt Reduction SIT Reduction in SIT Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Time in ms 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 M Time in ms Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time ms
67. 0 Speed 0 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the SETTINGS 5 menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped EH T 2s change the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2 s 162 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF JOG Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Ulm APPLICATION FUNCT continued JOG JOG Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 148 JOG JOG L 13 Pulse operation The JOG function is only active if the command channel and the reference channels are on the terminals The function is active when the assigned input or bit is at 1 Example 2 wire control operation tCC 2C Motor Ramp Ramp frequency DEC DE2 forced to 0 1 s Reference JGF reference 0 JGF reference LI JOG LL ILE 0 gt JGt Fo
68. 1 1 od 1 1 oe OCO Na od od 1 1 1 1 I J 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 Current 4 1 CLO 1 1 I I 1 SCL Adjustable speed threshold above which current limitation is active CLO Current limitation for high speed function Note The speed reached for a specific current will be lower in case of network undervoltage in comparison with nominal network voltage 188 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Rope slack The Rope slack function can be used to help to prevent starting up at high speed when a load has been set down ready for lifting but the rope is still slack as illustrated below ZS LASSER MAZZI AD Speed 4 OSP Load 4 rstL 4 The speed step OSP parameters described on page 187 is used to measure the load The effective measurement cycle will not be triggered until the load reaches the adjustable threshold Rope slack trq level 5 L which corresponds to the weight of the hook A logic output or a relay can be assigned to the indication of the rope slack state in the INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG _ menu 51 28692 03 2010 189 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FUn FUNCT continued nl Shin HIGH SPEED HOISTING Note This function cannot be used with
69. 1 SrP J 1 1 MEM 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 speed 1 1 Forward Reverse 51 28692 03 2010 171 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting APPLICATION FUNCT continued rubis SPEED AROUND REF The function can be accessed for reference channel Ref 1 channel F 1 Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 151 US 1 speed assignment No 5 0 n 0 No B Not assigned L I L LH Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 138 1 Speed assignment No 0 See the assignment conditions on page 138 Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1 5r R Speed limitation 0 to 50 1096 This parameter limits the variation range with speed as a of the reference The ramps used in this function are Acceleration 2 A 2 and Deceleration 2 d E 2 This parameter can be accessed if speed is assigned Acceleration 2 0 00 to 6 000 s 2 5 00 s Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq F 5 To have repeatability in ramps the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility o
70. 116 PTCL alarm Ext fault al E F H External fault alarm Under V U 5 A Undervoltage alarm I attained Current threshold attained Current threshold 4 page 89 Freq Th att Frequency threshold attained Freq threshold 2 page 89 Freq Th 2 attain A Frequency threshold 2 attained Freq Th 2 attain 2 d page 89 Freq ref att 5 Frequency reference attained Th mot att 5 A Motor 1 thermal state attained Th mot2 att 5 2 Motor 2 thermal state attained Th mot3 att 5 3 Motor 3 thermal state attained warn U P A Undervoltage threshold HSP attain F L A High speed attained Al C drv Drive overheating error al E PID error alarm PID fdbk al P F H PID feedback alarm Al 4 20 3 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input Lim att 5 5 A Torque limit alarm Th drv att H d Drive thermal state attained IGBT alarm JA IGBT alarm Underload Proc Al U L A Underload alarm Overload Proc Al A Overload alarm Rope slack alarm 5 Rope slack see Rope slack config 5 9 parameter page 190 High torque alarm H A Motor torque overshooting high threshold High torque thd H page 89 Low torque alarm L Motor torque undershooting low threshold Low torque thd L
71. 5 menu 2 If a graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9 999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit for example 15 65 for 15 650 3 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6 000 s according to Ramp increment r page 155 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1 2s To change the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2 s 51 28692 03 2010 199 Configuration Mode ConF PID PRESET REFERENCES Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting APPLICATION FUNCT continued PID PRESET REFERENCES Function can be accessed if PID feedback ass F page 196 is assigned 2112 2 2 preset PID ref No 5 0 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the function is inactive If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the function is active n E O Not assigned L IL LH 1 Logical input 11 See the assignment conditions on page 138 fee 4 preset PID ref No 5 0 Check that 2 pre
72. 5 lt LYVLS lt 747 uoneanBiyuoo oen 5 74 ISONILLAS ANOLOVA i DNIMOLINOW 1 472 Code nflAd 5 71 5 nPr nrd em ASPS 5 OHL 1 28692 03 2010 ULL 05 PAH PAL PAS PAU PES PF PHS PIA PIC P IF PIFI P IF PII PIL 310 Index of Parameter Codes CUSTOMER SETTING 4371 39 V3 1 NI 02 NOILVOINnIWWO2 114 11 1 N e N N N ee N N N N N N eS 19 S42018 112 2 Sia is o71 549 SLNdLNO s1ndNi 124 ES 124 103 1NOO 310LOW 335 59 1138 01 5 LLYVLS lt 757 oen 5 74 ISONILLAS ANOLOVA DNIMOLIN
73. HSP There are 2 possible operating modes Torque Speedreference mode The maximum permissible speed is calculated by the drive during a speed step that is set so that the drive can measure the load Current limitation mode The maximum permissible speed is the speed that supports current limitation in motor mode in the ascending direction only For the descending direction operation is in Speed reference mode 186 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Speed reference mode 4 Ascend or descend command Reference i Frequency Calculated limit OSP Adjustable speed step for load measurement tOS Load measuring time Two parameters are used to reduce the speed calculated by the drive for ascending and descending 187 51 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Current limiting mode Ascend command 1 1 Reference i 2 TEN I Pec 997 ser __________________ Pos 1 0 xL 1 1 1 1 1 1 Frequency RS TEE 1 Limit imposed by current FrS BEEN NL LLL i limitation 1 1 I 1 1 J SCL 4 T 1 1 1 1 1
74. If the assigned input or bit is at 0 channel Cmd channel 1 d is active If the assigned input or bit is at 1 channel channel 2 d 2 is active 1 ch1 active 1 channel 1 C d active no switching d 2 ch2 active channel 2 d 2 active no switching I L14 L Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 138 not JOD to 15 1 channel 1 Terminals E r This parameter can be accessed if Profile F is set to Separate 5 or I O profile 0 E Terminals E Terminals LEE L Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal Modbus Integrated Modbus Hn A n Integrated CANopen Com card E Communication card if inserted Ede Cmd channel 2 Modbus d b This parameter be accessed if Profile F is set to Separate 5 E P or I O profile O E Terminals E Terminals LEE L Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal I1 d b Modbus 7 d b Integrated Modbus Hn A n Integrated CANopen n EE Com card n Communication card if inserted Ref 2 switching Ref 1 channel 1 This parameter be accessed if Profile F is set to
75. Initial response Pd Increase in SPG AA Increase in SPG Reference division 4 1 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Time in ms 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 g Reference division 4 1 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms 51 28692 03 2010 79 Configuration Mode ConF Special case Parameter speed loop filter 5 is not 0 This parameter must be reserved for specific applications that require a short response time trajectory positioning or servo control When set to 100 as described above the regulator is a PI type without filtering of the speed reference Settings between 0 and 100 will obtain an intermediate function between the settings below and those on the previous page Example Setting for speed loop filter 5 100 Speed prop gain 5 affects the passband and response time Speed time integral 5 affects excessive speed Initial response Reduction in SIT Reduction in Reference division Reference division Reference division 1 1 1 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 45
76. Load variation detection 248 Motor or configuration switching IMULTIMOTORS CONFIG ANE 217 Motor thermal protection 236 Noise reduction 107 OUTPUT CONTACTOR CMD 208 Ovld Proces Mngmt 253 PARAM SET SWITCHING 215 5 PASSWORD 282 PID REGULATOR 196 POSITIONING BY SENSORS 209 PRESET SPEEDS 165 PTC probe 232 RAMP 155 REFERENCE SWITCH 152 Rope slack 189 RP assignment 115 REFERENCE MEMORIZING STOP CONFIGURATION 158 Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch gt lt gt 51 28692 03 2010 299 Index of Functions Function Page Summing input Subtracting input Multiplier 153 Synchronous motor parameters 99 TORQUE LIMITATION 201 TRAVERSE CONTROL 222 Underload Managmt 252 Use of the Pulse input input to measure the speed of rotation of the motor 246 300 1 28692 03 2010 Index of Parameter Codes Index of Parameter Codes The following table represents the parameter codes Code CUSTOMER SETTING o ue E z o z o0 o o 72 z 2 x z o 2 o e 2 E x o 3 4 j si z 72 2 lt z 5 m a z 16 5 a z E 2 9 a N LE lt lt e T i em Su Ba
77. Macro Configuration 70 Full 73 51 28692 03 2010 65 Configuration Mode ConF Introduction Configuration mode includes 4 parts 1 My Menu menu includes up to 25 parameters available for user customization using the graphic display terminal or SoMove software 2 Store recall parameter set These 2 functions are used to store and recall customer settings 3 Macro configuration 5 parameter which allows to load predefined values for applications see page 70 4 FULL This menu provides access to all other parameters It includes 10 sub menus SIMPLY START 5 7 page 73 SETTINGS 5 page 77 MOTOR CONTROL d page 92 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG _ 0 page 112 COMMAND L page 139 FUNCTION BLOCK b page 143 APPLICATION FUNCT page 152 FAULT MANAGEMENT L page 232 COMMUNICATION page 256 ACCESS LEVEL L page 262 66 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Organization tree Displayed parameter values are given as examples only 5 00 ESC ENT 51 28692 03 2010 67 Configuration Mode ConF My Menu Code Name Description E TEL male 1 3 CONFIGURATION MY MENU This menu contains the parameters selected in the 3 4 DISPLAY CONFIG F menu on pag
78. Mot therm current E H In the SETTINGS 5 E menu Communication All the parameters in the COMMUNICATION menu 51 28692 03 2010 279 Open Save as trA 280 1 28692 03 2010 Password COd Password COd With graphic display terminal Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 IDENTIFICATION 3 INTERFACE ENT 4 OPEN SAVE AS p 5 PASSWORD Code Quick Unlocked With integrated display terminal Enables the configuration to be protected with an access code or a password to be entered in order to access a protected configuration Example with graphic display terminal RUN Term 50 0 Hz 0 0 5 PASSWORD State Unlocked PIN code 1 OFF Upload rights Permitted ENT Download rights Unlock RUN Term 50 0Hz 00 PIN 1ode 1 9529 Max 9999 Code lt lt gt gt Quick The drive is unlocked when the PIN codes are set to Unlocked no password or when the correct code has been entered All menus are visible Before protecting the configuration with an access code you must Define the Upload rights U L and Download rights d L r Make a careful note of the code and keep it in a place where you will be able to find it 51 28692 03 2010 281 Password COd The drive has 2 access codes enabling 2 access levels to be set up PIN code
79. Motor fluxing F L is set to Continuous F the drive automatically builds up flux Q Check this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury is CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage The parameter is visible if Motor control type E page 92 is not set to Sync 5 In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the motor In Continuous mode the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up In Not cont mode fluxing occurs when the motor starts up The flux current is greater than Rated mot current when the flux is established and is then adjusted to the motor magnetizing current See page 174 F n E Not cont Non continuous mode Continuous Continuous mode This option is not possible if Auto DC injection d page 161 is Yes 5 or if Type of stop 5 E E page 158 is Freewheel 5 5E F n EU No F n 0 Function inactive This option is not possible if Brake assignment b L page 179 is not No D ELS Low speed time out 0 to 999 9 s 0s Maximum operating time at Low speed
80. PID integral reset Ref 2 switching LI4 2 wire No 4 preset speeds Fault reset External fault 2 preset PID Fault reset ref LI5 2 wire No 8 preset speeds Torque limitation No 4 preset PID No ref LI6 2 wire No Fault reset No No No No 111 3 wire Drive running Drive running Drive running Drive running Drive running Drive running 112 3 wire Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward LI3 3 wire Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse 1141 3 wire No 2 preset speeds Jog Fault reset PID integral Ref 2 reset switching LI5 3 wire No 4 preset speeds Fault reset External fault 2 preset PID Fault reset ref 1161 3 wire No 8 preset speeds Torque limitation No 4 preset PID No ref LO1 No No No No No No Graphic display terminal keys F1 key No No No No No Control via graphic display terminal F2 F3 F4 No No No No No No keys In 3 wire control the assignment of inputs LI1 to LI6 shifts 51 28692 03 2010 71 Configuration Mode ConF Other configurations and settings In addition to the assignment of inputs outputs other parameters are assigned only in the Hoisting macro configuration Hoisting e Movement type b 5 E is set to Hoisting L E page 179 Brake contact is setto No O page 179 e Brake impuls
81. Ref 2 switching nO Forward Reverse STOP Graphic display YES terminal Stop Key priority Ref 2 channel Key Parameter The black square represents the factory setting assignment 134 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Command channel for Separate 5 configuration Separate reference and command Parameters F L 0 and F L are common to reference and command Example If the reference is in forced local mode via A I analog input at the terminals command in forced local mode is L logic input at the terminals The command channels d and are independent of the reference channels Fr Fr lb and Fd LI o nO Al2 1 Cmd channel 1 Cd e LCC4 RUN STOP FWD REV Graphic display terminal LI Profile Cmd switching E L local CMD Forward gt Reverse nO Graphic display STOP YES terminal PSE ra gt Stop Key priority Cmd channel 2 Key Parameter 4 The black square represents the factory setting assignment except for Profile Ed Eds Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card 1 28692 03 2010 135 Configuration Mode ConF Command cha
82. Scaling AO1 max 0 to 100 096 100 096 Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter as a of the maximum possible variation IF AO1 Filter 0 to 10 00 s 0s Interference filtering This parameter is forced to 0 if AO1 assignment is set to dO 1 90 1 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 51 28692 03 2010 129 Configuration Mode ConF The following submenus group the alarms into 1 to 3 groups each of which can be assigned to a relay or a logic output for remote signaling These groups can also be displayed on the graphic display terminal see 3 3 MONITORING CONFIG C F menu page 266 and viewed via the 1 2 MONITORING menu page 41 When one or a number of alarms selected in a group occurs this alarm group is activated Code Il a fal Name Description INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG continued ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION USA EZA SAA ESA zt i25 gl UPA FEA HEE ESI ULA OLA Hcr EE Selection to be made from the following list LI6 PTC
83. Scaling AOx max 5 Hx Upper limit of the assigned parameter 100 96 New scale Lower limit of the assigned parameter Application example 2 The value of the motor current at the AO1 output is to be transferred with 0 20 mA range 2 In motor In motor being the equivalent of a 0 8 In drive The I motor O parameter varies between 0 2 times the rated drive current or a range of 2 5 times the rated drive current Scaling AO1 min A 5 1 1 must not modify the lower limit which therefore remains at its factory setting of 096 Scaling AO1 A 5 H 1 must modify the upper limit by 0 5x the rated motor torque or 100 100 5 80 new value lower limit range x ASH1 128 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG continued inf laf p AO1 CONFIGURATION HU AO1 assignment 0 n E No O Not assigned HE r I motor r Current in the motor between 0 and 2 In In rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate OF Motor freq r Output frequency from 0 to Max frequency OF 5 Sig frq O F 5 Signed output frequency between Max frequency and Max frequency E F r P Ramp out From 0 to Max frequency E r 3 Motor torq
84. Skip Frequency 2 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz Q 2nd skip frequency This parameter helps to prevent prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency This function can be used to help to prevent a critical speed which would cause resonance being reached Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive Jie 3j 3rd Skip Frequency 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz Q 3rd skip frequency This parameter helps to prevent prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency This function can be used to help to prevent a critical speed which would cause resonance being reached Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive ANE fal Skip Freq Hysteresis 0 1 to 10 Hz 1Hz This parameter is visible if at least one skip frequency Skip Frequency J P Skip Frequency 2 J F or 3rd Skip Frequency J F 3 is different from 0 Q Skip frequency range between JPF and JPF JF H for example This adjustment is common to the 3 frequencies JP F JF 2 JF 3 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the SETTINGS 5 menu These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be mod
85. in V 2 in V AI3 in mA A01 in V ETA state world Alarm groups Frequency ref in Hz parameter displayed in factory configuration Output frequency in Hz Motor current in A parameter displayed in factory configuration Motor speed in rpm Motor voltage in V Motor power in W Motor torque as a 96 Mains voltage in V Motor thermal state as a 96 Drv thermal state as a 96 Consumption in Wh or kWh depending on drive rating Run time in hours length of time the motor has been switched on Power on time in hours length of time the drive has been switched on IGBT alarm counter in seconds total time of IGBT overheating alarms Min freq time in seconds PID reference as a 96 PID feedback as a 96 PID error as a 96 PID Output in Hz Config active CNFO 1 or 2 see page 217 Utilised param set SET1 2 or 3 see page 215 Select the parameter using ENT a then appears next to the parameter Parameter s can also be deselected using ENT 1 or 2 parameters can be selected Example MONITORING 266 51428692 03 2010 Interface ItF Monitor screen type Code In mE Name Description MONITOR SCREEN TYPE Factory setting 0 Display value type Digital J E E Bar graph BH List L 15 PARAMETER SELECTION Digital 2 E A11 Al2 AI3 AO1 ETA state
86. is possible HF inj activation HF Yes 5 is possible Angle setting type PSIO align P 5 1H Mode for measuring the phase shift angle Visible only if Motor control type E is set to Sync mot 5 PSI align 5 and PSIO align P 5 O are working for all type of synchronous motors SPM align 5 P and IPM align P increase performances depending on the type of synchronous motor IPM align P Alignment for IPM motor Alignment mode for Interior buried Permanent Magnet motor usually this kind of motor has a high saliency level It uses high frequency injection which is less noisy than standard alignment mode SPM align 5 P Alignment for SPM motor Mode for Surface mounted Permanent Magnet motor usually this kind of motor has a medium or low saliency level It uses high frequency injection which is less noisy than standard alignment mode PS PSI align P 5 1 Pulse signal injection Standard alignment mode by pulse signal injection PS PSIO align P 5 10 Pulse signal injection Optimized Standard optimized alignment mode by pulse signal injection The phase shift angle measurement time is reduced after the first run order or tune operation even if the drive has been turned off n 0 No align 2 No alignment 51 28692 03 2010 101 Configuration Mode ConF C
87. or equipment damage Automatic current injection on stopping at the end of the ramp Note There is an interlock between this function and Motor fluxing L page 83 If Motor fluxing F L is set to Continuous F C Auto DC injection d must be No D Note Auto DC injection A d is set to No n 0 when Motor control type page 92 is set to Sync mot 5 9n Auto DC injection A d is forced to No n O when Brake assignment 4 L page 179 is not set to No D This parameter gives rise to the injection of current even if a run command has not been sent It can be accessed with the drive running n 0 No a B No injection 5 Yes 5 Adjustable injection time Continuous Continuous standstill injection Auto DC inj level 1 0 to 1 2 In 2 0 7 In 2 CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating 1 Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Level of standstill DC injection current Auto DC injection d is not No O EdC DC inj time 1 0 1 to 30s 0 5s RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Long periods of DC injection braking can cause overheating and damage the motor Q Protect the motor by avoiding long periods of DC injection braking 1 Failure t
88. or if the Cfg Add function key on the MULTIPOINT SCREEN is pressed see below MULTIPOINT SCREEN Rdy 0 Rpm 0A 2 RUN 952 Rpm 101A 3 NLP 1500 Rpm 1250A 4 5 6 RUN 952 Rpm 101A 3 DUET Selection of a drive for multipoint dialog 952 rpm Not connected Rdy 0 Rpm 0A Motor current 101A Cfg Add Cfg Add In multipoint mode the command channel is not displayed From left to right the state then the 2 selected parameters and finally the drive address appear All menus can be accessed in multipoint mode Only drive control via the graphic display terminal is not authorized apart from the Stop key which locks all the drives If there is a trip on a drive this drive is displayed 51 28692 03 2010 283 Multipoint Screen 284 1 28692 03 2010 Maintenance and Diagnostics What s in this Part This part contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page 10 Maintenance 287 11 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 289 51 28692 03 2010 285 286 S1A28692 04 2010 Maintenance Maintenance Limitation of Warranty The warranty does not apply if the product has been opened except by Schneider Electric services Servicing CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE Adapt the following recommendations according to the environment conditions temperature chemical dust Failure to follow these instr
89. 0 Bit 7 Fault reset Fault acknowledgment active on 0 to 1 rising edge Bit 8 Halt Stop according to the Type of stop 5 parameter without leaving the Operation enabled state Bit 9 Reserved set to 0 Bit 10 Reserved set to 0 Bit 11 to Bit 15 Can be assigned to a command Possible values in the I O profile On state command 2 wire 2 Bit 0 Forward on state command 0 No forward command 1 Forward command The assignment of bit 0 cannot be modified It corresponds to the assignment of the terminals It can be switched Bit O d D 0 is only active if the channel of this control word is active Bit 1 to Bit 15 Can be assigned to commands On edge command 3 wire 3 Bit 0 Stop run authorization 0 Stop 1 Run is authorized a forward or reverse command Bit 1 Forward on 0 to 1 rising edge command The assignment of bits 0 and 1 cannot be modified It corresponds to the assignment of the terminals It can be switched Bits O 1 dH 1 only active if the channel of this control word is active Bit 2 to Bit 15 Can be assigned to commands ERCE BEM AOE HN I CAn RES Active ref channel HMI reference channel Terminals Terminals Local L Jog dial HMI 1 Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal Modbus 7 d b Integrated Modbus CANopen A n Integrated CANopen tUd
90. 0 to 599 Hz according to rating 40 Hz Frequency threshold above which the high speed limitation current is active This parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting H 5 D is set to I Limit 5 2 Q p 5 Rope slack config No n 0 Rope slack function This parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting H 5 5 is not set to No 0 n No D Function inactive dr 1 estim 2 1 Measurement of the load by estimating the torque generated by the drive P E 5 Ext sensor 5 Measurement of the load using a weight sensor can only be assigned if Weight sensor ass 5 page 185 is not No 5 190 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting ip Sie ib Rope slack trq level 0 to 100 0 Adjustment threshold corresponding to a load weighing slightly less than the hook when off load as a of the rated load This parameter can be accessed if Rope slack level 5 4 has been assigned 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus
91. 100 0 Derivative gain PrP PID ramp 0 to 99 9 s 0s PID acceleration deceleration ramp defined to go from Min PID reference P 1 to Max PID reference P 2 and vice versa 1 fe INE PID correct reverse No n 0 Reversal of the direction of correction PID correct reverse IC If PID correct reverse L is set to No O the speed of the motor will increase when the error is positive example pressure control with a compressor If PID correct reverse L issetto Yes 5 the speed ofthe motor will decrease when the error is positive example temperature control using a cooling fan n E o 0 No 5 Yes 5 Yes POL Min PID output 599 to 599 Hz 0 Hz Minimum value of regulator output in Hz Q 1 PUH Max PID output 0 to 599 Hz 60 Hz Maximum value of regulator output in Hz Q 1 BAL Min fbk alarm Min PID feedback P to 100 Max PID feedback P F 2 2 Minimum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback 1 51 28692 03 2010 197 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting PHH Max fbk alarm Min PID feedback I F to 1 000 Max PID feedback IF 2 2 Maximum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback 1 NE PID error Alarm 0 to 65 535 2 100 Regula
92. 2010 Configuration Mode ConF TORQUE LIMITATION There are two types of torque limitation With a value that is fixed by a parameter With a value that is set by an analog input Al or pulse If both types are enabled the lowest value is taken into account The two types of limitation can be configured or switched remotely using a logic input or via the communication bus Motoring torque Torque limit activ E L A lim EL Torgue limitation via parameter p Gen torque lim EL Torque limitation via AL I analog input RP 1 LI Yes IE S Q amp P mum Pd 4 No n B Limitation value Analog limit act E L Lowest value taken into account Yes 5 77 o T No 0 Torque ref assign AA 51 28692 03 2010 201 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Flin APPLICATION FUNCT continued TORQUE LIMITATION Torque limit activ No 0 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the function is inactive If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the function is active n No B Function inactive 5 Yes 5 Function always active L 11 Logical input LI1 D 1 See the assignment conditi
93. AO1 assignment page 129 is set to No 5 5 Movement type Hoisting L E HU Traveling H O r Resistive load movement translational motion of overhead crane for example Note If Motor control type E is set to Standard 5 d or VIF 5pts 5 Movement type 5 5 E is forced to Traveling HO r LIE r Hoisting L E Driving load movement hoisting winch for example Note If Weight sensor ass 5 page 185 is not No O Movement type 5 5 E is forced to Hoisting UE Brake contact No n 2 If the brake has a monitoring contact closed for released brake n E No O Not assigned L I I LH 1 Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 138 b IP Brake impulse Yes YE 5 Brake impulse This parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass 5 set to No 5 O see page 185 It is set to Yes 5 Q if Movement type 5 5 E is set to Hoisting U E n EU O The motor torque is given in the required operating direction at current Brake release FW 5 r 5 Yes 5 The motor torque is in forward direction check that this direction corresponds to ascending at current Brake release I FW 2 lbr 2IBR 2 b r The torque is in the required direction at current Brake release FW 4 r for F
94. Auto A U adjust if necessary Brake engage frequency b Leave in Auto A U E O adjust if necessary Brake engage time 4 E Set according to the type of brake It is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage Recommended settings for brake logic control for a horizontal hoisting application Brake impulse b P No Brake release current b Set to 0 Brake Release time Set according to the type of brake It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release Brake engage frequency b E n in open loop mode only Leave in Auto A U E O adjust if necessary Brake engage time 5 E Set according to the type of brake It is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage 176 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Brake logic control horizontal movement in open loop mode Frequency 4 c E eee Os Sees Lecce oes cse Bulyoo 7 Q uonoefu o 5 E g 12 LL o 5 TW r 1 1T eee SSS 2 5 2 PPP enbJo a mie ut rio E NI 1 l 1 1 1 gt xe
95. Check the internal connections internal cards Contact Schneider Electric Product Support Internal mftg zone Internal data inconsistent Recalibrate the drive performed by Schneider Electric Product Support Internal fault The option installed in the drive is not Check the reference and compatibility of the option option recognized InFS Internal I The current measurements are incorrect Replace the current sensors or the power card measure Contact Schneider Electric Product Support Internal mains The input stage is not operating correctly Contact Schneider Electric Product Support circuit Internal th The drive temperature sensor is not Replace the drive temperature sensor sensor operating correctly Contact Schneider Electric Product Support InFE internal CPU Internal microprocessor detected fault Turn off and reset Contact Schneider Electric Product Support OCF Overcurrent Parameters in the SETTINGS 5 E Check the parameters and MOTOR CONTROL d x E Check the size of the motor drive load menus are not correct Check the state of the mechanism Inertia or load too high Decrease Current limitation C L 1 Mechanical locking Increase the switching frequency SHEF Safe function fault Debounce time exceeded Check the safety functions configuration SS1 trip threshold exceeded Wrong con
96. End reel No n 0 The assigned output or relay changes to state 1 when the traverse control operating time reaches the Reel time b D n EU a O Not assigned L O I 101 O 1 Logical output LO1 R2 2 Relay R2 90 I dO1 d 7 1 Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO1 assignment 1 page 129 is set to No o D 51 28692 03 2010 227 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Sinis Counter wobble No n 0 Synchronization input To be configured on the winding drive slave only n 0 a O Function inactive thereby helping to prevent access to other parameters Logical input LI1 22s See the assignment conditions page 138 Is Be Sync wobble No 0 Synchronization output To be configured on the yarn guide drive master only n E No 2 Function not assigned Lo I LO1 L D 1 R2 1 901 90 1 Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO1 assignment 1 page 129 is set to No 1 Decrease ref speed 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz Decrease in the base reference during the traverse control cycle Pele iF Init traverse ctrl No n 0 When the state of the assigned input or bit changes to 1 the traverse control operating time
97. F n Not cont Non continuous mode Continuous Continuous mode This option is not possible if Auto DC injection page 161 is Yes 5 or if Type of stop 5 E page 158 is Freewheel n 5 F n U F O Function inactive In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the motor In Continuous F mode the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up In Not cont n mode fluxing occurs when the motor starts up The flux current is greater than Rated mot current r configured rated motor current when the flux is established and is then adjusted to the motor magnetizing current If Motor control type E page 92 is set to Sync 5 the Motor fluxing F L parameter causes the alignment of the rotor and not the fluxing If Brake assignment b L page 179 is not No n O the Motor fluxing L parameter has no effect Fluxing assignment No 5 0 CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Assignment is only possible if Motor fluxing F L U set to Not cont F nL If an LI or a bit is assigned to the motor fluxing command flux is built up when the assigned in
98. If the DC bus capacitors do not discharge completely contact your local Schneider Electric representative Do not repair or operate the drive Install and close all covers before applying power or starting and stopping the drive Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Read and understand this manual before installing or operating the Altivar 32 drive Any changes made to the parameter settings must be performed by qualified personnel Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury A WARNING DAMAGE DRIVE EQUIPMENT Do not operate or install any drive or drive accessory that appears damaged Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control paths and for certain critical control functions provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure Examples of critical control functions are emergency stop and overtravel stop Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions System control paths may include communication links Consideration must be given to the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of the link Failure to follow these instructions
99. If they have not been reset the drive will display Freewheel stop 5 but will not start If the automatic restart function has been configured Automatic restart r parameter in the FAULT MANAGEMENT L menu page 232 these commands are taken into account without a reset to zero being necessary CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO DRIVE Frequent use of the contactor will cause premature aging to the charge circuit of the filter capacitors Do not power up the drive less than every 60 seconds Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Using a motor with a lower rating or dispensing with a motor altogether With the factory settings motor output phase loss detection is active Output Phase Loss UP 1 Yes YE 5 page 238 To avoid having to use a motor with the same rating as the drive when testing the drive or during a maintenance phase deactivate the motor output phase loss detection Dutput Phase Loss No This can prove particularly useful if very large drives are being tested with a small motor Set Motor control type page 92 to Standard 5 d in Motor control menu dr CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Motor thermal protection will not be provided by the drive if the motor s nominal current is 2096 lower than that of the drive In this case find an alternative source of thermal protection F
100. ItF Access Level LAC With integrated display terminal From F menu Code Name Description Factory setting IEF 3 INTERFACE LAC 3 1 ACCESS LEVEL Standard 5 d Q b A 5 Basic b A 5 Limited access to SIMPLY START 5 1N 1 2 MONITORING 70 n SETTINGS 5 FACTORY SETTINGS F 5 5 PASSWORD and 3 1 ACCESS LEVEL L AL menus Only one function can be assigned to each input Standard 5 d Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal Only one function can be assigned to each input A d LI Advanced d L Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal Several functions can be assigned to each input E Pr Expert E P Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal and access to additional parameters Several functions can be assigned to each input Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 262 1 28692 03 2010 Interface ItF Comparison of the menus that can be accessed on the graphic display terminal integrated display terminal Access level 1 DRIVE MENU dx 1 1 SPEED REFERENCE F 1 2 MONITORING NNO Monitoring motor IU MAP 5 Monitoring Safety I1 F b Monitoring Function Block
101. L A or LAI2 L A 2 in a configuration they remain active in their behaviors in analog input mode example Ref 1 channel is still set to Remove the configuration of or AI2 2 in analog input mode or Check this behavior will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Note LA1 L and LA2 L A 2 can be used as 2 logic inputs in source mode only 24 V power supply max 30 V State 0 if lt 7 5 V state 1 if gt 8 5 V Note The stop keys on the graphic display terminal or remote display can be programmed as non priority keys A stop key can only have priority if the Stop Key priority 5 parameter in the COMMAND E L menu 139 is set to Yes 5 The behavior of the Altivar 32 can be adapted according to requirements Not separ 5 Command and reference are sent via the same channel Separate 5 E P Command and reference may be sent via different channels In these configurations control via the communication bus is performed in accordance with the DRIVECOM standard with only 5 freely assignable bits see Communication Parameters Manual The application functions cannot be accessed via the communication interface e I O profile 0 The command and the reference can come from different channels Th
102. Not assigned A I I AH 1 Analog input A1 12 AI2 12 Analog input A2 13 AIS 13 Analog input HE r I motor x Motor current OF Motor freq Motor speed P out Ramp output 9 Motor torq 9 Motor torque SE 9 Sign torque 5 3 Signed motor torque 5 Sign ramp 5 Signed ramp output DOP 5 PID ref 0 P 5 reference PID feedbk PI D feedback PID error error PID output 1 integral OP x Mot power r Motor power E Hr Mot thermal H r Motor thermal state E Hd Drv thermal Drive thermal state E 9115 Torque 4Q 9N 5 Signed motor torque UP dE Speed U F d Up Down function is assigned by Lix UP dH HMI Up Down function is assigned by graphic display terminal or remote display terminal LEE HMI L Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal source Modbus 7 d 5 Integrated Modbus Hn CANopen A n Integrated CANopen n E E Com card Communication option board source OF 5 Sig frq O F 5 Signed output frequency E Hr Mot therm2 H r 2 Motor 2 thermal state E Hr J Mot therm3 Hr 3 Motor 3 thermal state EL Torque lim 9L Torque limitation Motor volt U Mo
103. O Motor thermal state is not stored at power off 5 Yes 5 Motor thermal state is stored at power off 51 28692 03 2010 237 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FLES FAULT MANAGEMENT continued OUTPUT PHASE LOSS OPL Output Phase Loss Yes YE 5 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH If Output phase loss is set to No or Output cut loss of cable is not detected Check this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Note Output phase loss is set to No a 5 when Motor control type page 92 is set to Sync mot 5 For other Motor control type E E configurations Output phase loss is forced to Yes HE 5 if brake logic control is configured n O 2 Function inactive 5 Yes 5 Tripping on Output phase loss with freewheel stop OAC Output cut No fault triggered but management of the output voltage in order to avoid an overcurrent when the link with the motor is re established and catch on the fly performed even if this function has not been configured The drive switches to Output cut 5 state after OutPh time detect time Catch on fly
104. REF OPERATIONS 153 APE RAMP 155 SEE STOP CONFIGURATION 158 AUTO DC INJECTION 161 405 JOG 163 PSSS PRESET SPEEDS 166 UPd SPEED 170 SE SPEED AROUND REF 172 173 FE t FLUXING BY LI 174 BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL 179 EXTERNAL WEIGHT MEAS 185 HH e HIGH SPEED HOISTING 190 P Ide PID REGULATOR 196 Pe t PID PRESET REFERENCES 200 TORQUE LIMITATION 202 EL f 2nd CURRENT LIMIT 204 ELT x LINE CONTACTOR COMMAND 206 BE OUTPUT CONTACTOR CMD 208 Eee POSITIONING BY SENSORS 212 TL P PARAM SET SWITCHING 215 MULTIMOTORS CONFIG 220 EE AUTO TUNING BY LI 221 Ese TRAVERSE CONTROL 222 CHS HSP SWITCHING 229 The parameters in the APPLICATION FUNCT F menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and there is no run command except for parameters with a symbol the code column which can be modified with the drive running or stopped 51 28692 03 2010 147 Configuration Mode ConF Note Compatibility of functions The choice of application functions may be limited by the number of I O and by the fact that some functions are incompatible with others Functions that are not listed in the table below are fully compatible If there is an incompatibility between functions the first function configured will help to prevent the others
105. Rated linear speed 0 20 to 5 00 m s 1 00 m s This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned and Stop distance 5 9 is not set to No n D Rated linear speed in meters second Ef Stop corrector 50 to 20096 10096 This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned and Stop distance 5 d is not set to No 6 D Scaling factor applied to the stop distance to compensate for example a non linear ramp These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 51 28692 03 2010 213 Configuration Mode ConF PARAMETER SET SWITCHING A set of 1 to 15 parameters from the SETTINGS 5 E menu on page 77 can be selected and 2 or different values assigned These 2 or 3 sets of values can then be switched using 1 or 2 logic inputs or control word bits This switching can be performed during operation motor running It can also be controlled on the basis of 1 or 2 frequency thresholds whereby each threshold acts as a logic input 0 threshold not reached 1 threshold reached Values 1 Values 2 Values 3 Parameter 1 Parame
106. a loss of power or when the drive detects a fault Where necessary use a separate brake to maintain torque levels Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 1 3 CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode This parameter be accessed if Type of stop 5 is set to DC injection dC or if DC injection assign dC 1 is not No 1 Ed DC injection time 1 0 1to 30s 0 5s CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Long periods of DC injection braking can cause overheating and damage the motor Protect the motor by avoiding long periods of DC injection braking Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage 1 3 Maximum current injection time DC inject level 1 dL After this time the injection current becomes DC inject level 2 d 2 This parameter can be accessed if Type of stop 5 is set to DC injection dC or if DC injection assign dC 1 is not set to No 5 O 51 28692 03 2010 159 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Il DC inject
107. att 5 2 Motor 2 thermal threshold TTD2 reached Th mot3 att 5 3 Motor 3 thermal threshold TTD3 reached Neg Torque A 5 Negative torque braking Cnfg 0 act C n Configuration 0 active Cnfg 1 act C n 1 Configuration 1 active Cnfg 2 act C n F 2 Configuration 2 active Set 1 active F P I Parameter set 1 active Set 2 active F P 2 Parameter set 2 active Set 3 active F P 3 Parameter set 3 active DC charged d b L DC bus charging In braking 5 Drive braking removed P Drive locked by Safe Torque Off input Fr met alar 9L A Measured speed threshold attained Pulse warning thd 9L page 89 I present N Motor current present Limit sw att L 5 A Limit switch attained Load alarm dL d Load variation detection see page 248 Alarm Grp 1 5 5 1 Alarm group 1 Alarm Grp 2 A G 2 Alarm group 2 Alarm Grp 3 A G 3 Alarm group LI6 PTC LI6 PTCL alarm Ext fault al E F H External fault alarm Under V U 5 A Undervoltage alarm Uvolt warn U P A Undervoltage threshold Al C drv H A Drive overheating Lim att 5 5 A Torque limit alarm IGBT al JA Thermal junction alarm Brake 5 5 Torque regulation time out alarm Al 4 20 3 4 20 mA loss alarm Brake d Torque regulation time out alarm
108. being configured Each of the functions on the following pages can be assigned to one of the inputs or outputs DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION A single input can activate several functions at the same time reverse and 2nd ramp for example Ensure that these functions can be used at the same time Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 148 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF It is only possible to assign one input to several functions at Advanced d L and Expert r levels Before assigning a command reference or function to an input or output the user must check that this input or output has not already been assigned and that another input or output has not been assigned to an incompatible function The drive factory setting or macro configurations automatically configure functions which may help to prevent other functions being assigned In some case it is necessary to unconfigure one or more functions in order to be able to enable another Check the compatibility table below Stop functions have priority over run commands Speed references via logic command have priority over analog references Note This compatibility table does not affect commands that can be assigned to the keys of the graphic display terminal see page 24 51 28692 03 2010 149 Configuration Mode ConF Compatibility table speed around a refe
109. c 6 gt y 5 o 5 lt 5 288 8 55 98 o 23 5 Cg 2 8 c 5 o wW ra 3 4 gt c o a 5 3 5 c gt a o Brake engage freq bE Brake engage time Brake Release time bre e Ibr Brake release FW e SdC 1 Auto DC inj level 1 e Brake engage delay EE r Time to restart 177 51 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Frequency 4 Brake logic control vertical movement in open loop mode g 5 cC E EL J X4 Bur420 Ne a ens aN Ne uonoefu e c 5 c 2 a g S 9 1 o lt D v jH 1 1 x 3 b IE PRENNE enbJo eI SSS SP ee pev TR epe S xn 4 ee 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EL o o 8 994 525 5 2 2 89 E 9
110. connected to the drive serial link see the documentation supplied with the remote display terminal With this remote display terminal up and down arrows are used for navigation rather than a jog dial 1 Four digits display 5 Navigation keys 2 MODE key 1 B 6 ENT key Used to switch Used to save the current value or 1 1 SPEED REFERENCE r M access the selected menu parameter 1 2 MONITORING and ONF Uni 1 3 CONFIGURATION On F 8 Key for reversing the direction of menus MODE A rotation of the motor ENT 3 ESC key ESC 7 Used to quit a menu parameter or Used to stop the motor and perform a remove the currently displayed value in reset order to revert to the previous value retained in the memory o T 4 RUN key Executes the function assuming it has been configured 1 If the drive is locked by a code PIN code 1 page 282 pressing the MODE key enables you to switch from the 1 2 MONITORING menu to the 1 1 SPEED REFERENCE menu and vice versa To activate the keys on the remote display terminal you first have to configure Ref 1 channel HMI L For more information see page 139 30 1 28692 03 2010 Overview Structure of the parameter tables The parameter tables contained in the descriptions of the various menus are organized as follows Example 9 Code Name Description Adjustmen
111. format Adjustment range 4 reference PIP2 15 000 PIP1 6 000 4 PID feedback PIF1 PIF2 4 500 20 000 Other parameters PID wake up thresh 5L parameter Can be used to set the PID error threshold above which the PID regulator will be reactivated wake up after a stop due to the max time threshold being exceeded at low speed Low speed time out L 5 e Reversal of the direction of correction PID correct reverse P C If PID correct reverse P is set to No O the speed of the motor will increase when the error is positive for example pressure control with a compressor If PID correct reverse P ICE is setto Yes 5 the speed of the motor will decrease when the error is positive for example temperature control using a cooling fan The integral gain may be short circuited by a logic input Analarm on the PID feedback may be configured and indicated by a logic output An alarm on the PID error may be configured and indicated by a logic output 51 28692 03 2010 193 Configuration Mode ConF Manual Automatic Operation with PID This function combines the PID regulator the preset speeds and a manual reference Depending on the state of the logic input the speed reference is given by the preset speeds or by a manual reference input via the PID function Manual reference Manual reference P Analog inputs to Pulse inp
112. if AO1 Type E is set to Voltage 0 U AO1 min output mA Current scaling parameter of 0 Can be accessed if AO1 Type is set to Current AOH AO1 max output mA Current scaling parameter of 100 Can be accessed if AO1 Type E is set to Current 5 A ASL 1 Scaling AO1 max 96 Minimum scaling value for AO1 ASH I Scaling AO1 min 96 Maximum scaling value for AO1 HU IF AO1 filter 5 Cutoff time of the low filter 51 28692 03 2010 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Name Description Unit I O MAP continued FS FREQ SIGNAL IMAGE Frequency signal image This menu is visible only on graphic display terminal PFrE RP input Hz Filtered customer pulse input frequency reference Following parameters are visible on the graphic display terminal by pressing the ENT key on the parameter el 118 RP assignment Pulse input assignment If no functions have been assigned No 2 is displayed Identical to assignment page 46 Iz HE RP min value kHz RP minimum value Pulse input scaling parameter of 0 PFr RP max value kHz RP maximum value Pulse input scaling parameter of 100 TI RP filter ms Interference filtering pulse input cutoff time of the low filter NOn 1 2 MONITORING continued SIRE MONIT SAFETY For more details on Integrated Safety Functions please refer to
113. indication These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped i 25 change the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2 s 51 28692 03 2010 245 Configuration Mode ConF Use of the Pulse input input to measure the speed of rotation of the motor This function uses the Pulse input input and can only be used if the Pulse input input is not being used for another function Example of use An indexed disk driven by the motor and connected to a proximity sensor can be used to generate a frequency signal that is proportional to the speed of rotation of the motor Time in seconds When applied to the Pulse input input this signal supports Measurement and display of the motor speed signal frequency 1 T This frequency is displayed by means of the Pulse in work freq 4 5 parameter page 44 Overspeed detection if the measured speed exceeds a preset threshold the drive will trip Brake failure detection if brake logic control has been configured If the speed does not drop sufficiently quickly following a command to engage the brake the drive will t
114. is detected when the next event occurs and remains pending for a minimum time Ovid Time Detect which is configurable The drive is in current limitation mode The motor is in steady state and the current is above the set overload threshold Ovid Detection Thr L The motor is in steady state when the offset between the frequency reference and motor frequency falls below the configurable threshold Hysteresis Freq Att 5 b A relay or a logic output can be assigned to the signaling of this detected fault in the INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG menu Q 1 Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FAULT MANAGEMENT continued f r PROCESS OVERLOAD Ovld Time Detect 0 to 100 s 0s Overload detection time delay A value of 0 deactivates the function and makes the other parameters inaccessible IL Detection Thr 70 to 15096 11096 Overload detection threshold as a of the rated motor current Rated mot current page 74 This value must be less than the limit current in order for the function to work E rp da 1 Hysteresis Freq Att 0 to 599 Hz 0 3 Hz Maximum deviation between the frequency reference and the motor frequency which defines steady state operation nl CHE Ovid Proces Mngmt Freewheel 5 Behavior on switching to overload detection
115. is possible as soon as the drive is in Stand by output cut Output cut 5 state Odes OutPh time detect 0 5 to 10s 0 5s Time delay for taking the Output Phase Loss L detected fault into account FAULT MANAGEMENT continued INPUT PHASE LOSS PPE Input phase loss According to drive rating Cannot be accessed if drive rating is ATVeeeM2 In this case no factory settings value Factory setting Freewheel 5 for drive rating ATV32eeeNA If 1 phase disappears and if this leads to performance decrease the drive switches to fault mode Input phase loss P F H 1 2s If 2 or 3 phases disappear the drive trips in Input phase loss n 0 Ignore O Detected fault ignored YE 5 Freewheel 5 Detected fault with freewheel stop 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FAULT MANAGEMENT continued DRIVE OVERHEAT BHL Overtemp fault mgt Freewheel 5 A CAUTION RISK OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE Inhibiting drive overheating fault detection results in the drive not being protected This invalidates the warranty Check that the possible consequences do not present any risk Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage Behavior in the event of the drive overheating Note A trip will occur when the thermal state
116. is reset to 0 along with Decrease ref speed dt F n EU O Function not assigned Logical input LI1 EC See the assignment conditions on page 138 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the SETTINGS 5 E menu These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Q Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 228 51428692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF HIGH SPEED SWITCHING Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting APPLICATION FUNCT continued ERSE HSP SWITCHING 5 2 2 High speed INo 5 2 High Speed Switching n E O Function not assigned F A Freq Th attain A Frequency threshold attained Freq Th 2 attain A Frequency threshold 2 attained L I L LI L 1 Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 138 4 High speed No n 0 High Speed Switching Note In order to obtain 4 High speed 2 High speed 5 must also be configured Identical to 2 High speed 5 H 2 page 229 HSE High s
117. is taken into account for run 1 or stop 0 Ern Transition E A change of state transition or edge is necessary to initiate operation in order to avoid accidental restarts after a break in the power supply Fwd priority State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop but the forward input takes priority over the reverse input 112 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting rUn Drive Running No 0 Assignment of the stop command Visible only if 2 3 wire control is set to 3 wire 3 L LH 7 Logical input LI1 if not in VO profile 0 900 C d O D In VO profile 0 can be switched with possible logic inputs OLO I 0101 OL H 1 Function blocks Logical Output 01 HL OL10 OL 10 Function blocks Logical Output 10 Frd Forward IL L 1 0 Assignment of the forward direction command L I LH 7 Logical input LI1 if not in VO profile 7 900 d B D In VO profile 7 can be switched with possible logic inputs OLO I OLO1 510 I Function blocks Logical Output 01 HL OL10 OL 10 Function blocks Logical Output 10 ipi Reverse assign Li2 L 12 Assignment of the reverse direction command n E No O Not assigned L I1 LH 1 Logical input LI1
118. is the remote 1 detected fault reset display terminal dE Ll E Drive disparity The drive brand does not match that of the remote display terminal 1 E ROM anomaly The remote display terminal detects a ROM anomaly on the basis of checksum calculation 1 E RAM anomaly The remote display terminal detects a RAM anomaly 1 E Other detected faults Other detected faults 1 1 Flashing 296 1 28692 03 2010 Annex What s in this Part This part contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page 12 Index of Functions 299 13 Index of Parameter Codes 01 51 28692 03 2010 297 298 1 28692 03 2010 Index of Functions Index of Functions The following table represents the parameter codes Function Page 2 wire 2C 73 2nd CURRENT 204 3 wire 3C 73 SPEED 170 SPEED AROUND 172 AUTO DC INJECTION 161 AUTOMATIC RESTART 234 Auto tuning 75 AUTO TUNING BY LI 221 BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL 179 CATCH ON THE FLY 235 Command and reference channels 1811 Deferred stop on thermal alarm 240 DRIVE OVERHEAT 239 FACTORY SETTINGS 69 Fault reset 232 FLUXING BY LI 174 HIGH SPEED HOISTING 190 JOG 163 LINE CONTACTOR COMMAND 205 Load measurement 184 Load sharing 109
119. lt 103 1NOO YOLON wo 135 ISONILLAS 01 5 lt 747 uoneanBiyuoo oen 5 74 ISONILLAS ANOLOVA DNIMOLINOW 21 472 Code EHH I CHAE CHI ag EL ETE ELU LL5 E That 1 Cafe 5 COL COP EHS EP ErL3 Lr5t E EF 516 9 CSE dHe dHF dHL dHr dH5 dbS 1 JgHELES 303 51 28692 03 2010 Index of Parameter Codes CUSTOMER SETTING 4371 39 V3 1 NI NI NI UB 3 NOILVOINnIWWOO 774 LNV 241 o ol 1 N et N N U94 S42018 NOIL NN 4 112 2 o71 549 SLNdLNO s1ndNi P 103 1NOO wo fecal 335 ISONILLAS 01 5 lt 747 uoneanBiyuoo oen 5 74 ISONILLAS ANOLOVA DNIMOLINOW 1 472
120. mH FAULT INHIBITION InH Fault inhibit assign No 5 1 DANGER LOSS OF PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT PROTECTION Enabling Fault inhibit assign H will disable the drive controller protection features Fault inhibit assign H should not be enabled for typical applications of this equipment 2s Fault inhibit assign H should be enabled only in extraordinary situations where a thorough risk analysis demonstrates that the presence of adjustable speed drive protection poses a greater risk than personnel injury or equipment damage Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury If the assigned input or bit is at 0 detected fault monitoring is active If the assigned input or bit is at 1 fault monitoring is inactive Active detected faults are cleared on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned input or bit Note The Safe Torque Off function and any detected faults that help to prevent any form of operation are not affected by this function Following faults can be inhibited Rak Cof ERP ber LdbF EmF EPFi EPPS FEFBS Inf i OHF OPP 1 EPL PHP PEEL SL Pe SLES SOP SPP SSF bale and ULF n a 5 Function inactive 4 1 Logical input LI1 C See the assignment conditions on page 138 FLE FAULT MANAGEMENT continued pu
121. of the motor calculated using the drive parameters 0 to 10 Hz Manual control Brake engage delay 0 to 5 00 s 0s k A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL Modify the Brake engage delay for horizontal movement only otherwise the control of the load can be lost 1 Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Time delay before request to engage brake BEE Brake engage time 0 to 5 00 s 0s Brake engage time brake response time 1 DC inj level 1 0 to 1 2 In 2 0 7 In 2 9 CAUTION 1 RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Level of standstill DC injection current Note This parameter can be accessed if Movement type 4 5 page 179 is set to Traveling H bEd Engage at reversal No 5 D Can be used to select whether or not the brake engages on transition to zero speed when the operating direction is reversed Q n No B The brake does not engage 5 Yes 5 The brake engages 180 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting JI ral t Jump at reversal Auto A U E 0 to 10 Hz Auto A U E 0 This parameter
122. on the pages indicated to aid programming 9 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 51 28692 03 2010 191 Configuration Mode ConF PID REGULATOR Internal reference A Reference A Pages 132 and 133 Network AIU2 71 PID feedback Scaling 1 PIF2 x PSr PIP1 PIP2 Block diagram The function is activated by assigning an analog input to the PID feedback measurement LI Restart error Error threshold inversion wake up Auto Manual Predictive speed reference Ramps ACC DEC Preset manual references Manual Parameter The black square represents the factory setting assignment 1 Ramp AC2 is only active when the PID function starts up and during PID wake ups PID feedback The PID feedback must be assigned to one of the analog inputs AI1 to AI3 to the pulse input according to whether any extension cards have been inserted PID reference The PID reference must be assigned to the following parameters Preset references via logic inputs r 2 ids qp In accordance with the configuration of Act internal PID ref P page 196 Internal reference P Reference A Ref 1 channel F or Ref 1B channel F 4 see page 139 Combination table for preset PID references LI Pr 4 LI Pr
123. or equipment damage This parameter can be configured if BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL b page 179 is not set to No No 5 Not assigned 1 Analog input 1 12 A 1 2 Analog input 2 AI3 3 Analog input RP P Pulse input Al virtual 1 U 1 Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial Al virtual 2 11 2 Virtual analog input 2 by the communication bus OA01 DAD I Function blocks Analog Output 01 Tm mom ayes TS pee ly unus HH OA10 HH 10 Function blocks Analog Output 10 Point 1 X 0 to LP2 0 01 0 0 to 99 99 of signal on assigned input Point 1x L P must be less than Point 2x L P 2 This parameter be accessed if Weight sensor ass 5 is assigned EPI Point 1Y 1 36 In to 1 36 In 1 In 1 Current corresponding to load Point 1 X L in A This parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass 5 is assigned Point 2X LP1 0 01 to 100 50 0 01 to 100 of signal on assigned input Point 2x L P 2 must be greater than Point 1x L 1 This parameter be accessed if Weight sensor ass 5 is assigned Re Point 2Y 1 36 In to 1 36 In 1 Current corresponding to load Point 2x L P 2 in A This parameter be accessed if Weight sensor ass 5 is assigned lb A lbr
124. rather than in the drive Choice of the menu displayed on power up Code Name Description dLF 3 4 DISPLAY CONFIG 51 28692 03 2010 269 Interface ItF User parameters RDY If Return std name is set to Yes the display reverts to standard but the custom settings remain stored Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A USER PARAMETERS Return std name No ENT PARAMETER SELECTION CUSTOMIZED SELECTION FULL MY MENU SIMPLY START ENT PARAMETER SELECTION lt DEVICE NAME SERVICE MESSAGE CONFIGURATION 0 CONFIGURATION 1 PARAMETER SELECTION SETTINGS MOTOR CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG SETTINGS Ramp increment Acceleration Selection of 1 to 15 Deceleration parameters to be Acceleration 2 lt CONFIGURATION 2 customized lt SERIAL NUMBER a ENT List RDY Term 0 0Hz 0 0 Ramp increment Note The 1 line is PARAMETER SELECTION or Acceleration RDY Term 0 0 Hz 0 0 A depending on the path ENT or Deceleration 2 List List of customized parameters ENT RDY Term 0 0 2 00 Tem 1005 00A User name User name If no custom settings have FLOW REFERENCE been made the standard values appear names units etc Nb characters max 13 Display on 1 or 2 lines of characters Offsets and coefficients are Use F1 to change to ABC abc 123 numerical values Do no
125. s 51 28692 03 2010 97 Configuration Mode ConF Asynchronous motor parameters Expert mode Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting ASYNC MOTOR 51 Cust stator resist 0 to 65 535 mOhm 0 mOhm Cold state stator resistance per winding modifiable value 1 The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto tuning operation if it has been performed Lfw 0 to 655 35 mH 0 mH Cold state leakage inductance modifiable value The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto tuning operation if it has been performed IdH Idw 0 to 6 553 5 A OA Customer adjusted magnetizing current IS iP 18 Cust rotor t const 0 to 65 535 ms 0 ms Customer adjusted rotor time constant 1 On the integrated display unit O to 9 999 then 10 00 to 65 53 10 000 to 65 535 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 98 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Synchronous motor parameters These parameters can be accessed if Motor control type page 92 is set to Sync mot 5 In this case the asynchronous motor parameters cann
126. setting aaa uj L Hn mls ls 1 BUR 10 Ref 1 channel 1 Analog input 1 Al2 2 Analog input 2 AI3 3 Analog input HMI L Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal source Modbus 7 d b Integrated Modbus CANopen A n Integrated CANopen Com card n Communication card if inserted RP 1 Pulse input Al virtual 1 1 Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial only available if Profile F is not set to Not separ 5 OA01 0 H 1 Function blocks Analog Output 01 A 1 1 OA10 OA 10 Function blocks Analog Output 10 iP nl HB RV Inhibition Inhibition of movement in reverse direction does not apply to direction requests sent by logic inputs Reverse direction requests sent by logic inputs are taken into account Reverse direction requests sent by the graphic display terminal are not taken into account Reverse direction requests sent by the line are not taken into account Any reverse speed reference originating from the PID summing input etc is interpreted as a zero reference 0 Hz No 5 0 No n D Yes YE 5 FSE Yes YE 5 Stop Key priority A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL You are going to disable the stop key located on the remote displays Do not select No
127. state of logic inputs LI1 to LI6 display segment assignment high 1 low 0 State 1 MEIN p ALTES LE State0 Ini m LI1 LI2 LIS LIS 116 Example above 1 and LI6 are at 1 LI2 to LI5 are at 0 L 15 2 State of Safe Torque Off Can be used to visualize the state of LA1 LA2 and STO Safe Torque Off display segment assignment high 1 low 0 RII M Nc LA1LA2 STO Example above LA1 and LA2 are at 0 STO Safe Torque Off is at 1 51 28692 03 2010 45 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Name Description Unit fal Wal ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE Analog input functions V customer image Value of analog input 1 A 11 assignment functions assignment If no functions have been assigned No 2 is displayed Following parameters are visible on the graphic display terminal by pressing the ENT key on the parameter n EH No 02 Not assigned I Ref 1 channel F 1 Reference source 1 2 Ref 2 channel F 2 Reference source 2 5 Summing ref 2 5 A 2 Summing reference 2 P IF PID feedback feedback PI control E AA Torque limitation A A Torque limitation Activation by an analog value d H 2 Subtract ref 2 d A 2 Subtracting reference 2 P Manual PID ref P IM Manual speed reference of the PI D regulator au
128. the drive is stopped and no run command is present Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FULL continued figs INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 2 3 wire control 2 wire 2 25 DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION When this parameter is changed Reserve assign 5 and 2 wire type parameters and all the assignments involving the logic inputs will revert to their default values Check that this change is compatible with the wiring diagram used Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 2t 2 wire 2 C 2 wire control level commands This is the input state 0 or 1 or edge 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 which controls running or stopping Example of source wiring 24 LI1 LI1 forward 1 1 etr LIx reverse JC 3 wire 32 3 wire control pulse commands A forward or reverse pulse is sufficient to command starting a stop pulse is sufficient to command stopping Example of source wiring 7 24 LM 12 Lix LI1 stop EE A LI2 forward EFEX E reverse 2 wire type Transition E n A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Z 2s Check that the modification of the 2 wire type controls is compatible with the wiring diagram used Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury L E L Level L State 0 or 1
129. the pages indicated to aid programming 2s To change the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2 s Example of total return to factory settings Config Source F 5 is set to Macro Conf In PARAMETER GROUP LIST F issetto AL L Goto FACTORY SETTINGS 5 set Yes 5 70 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Assignment of the inputs outputs 1 To start with integrated Modbus Modbus Address d 4 must first be configured page 257 Note These assignments are reinitialized every time the macro configuration changes Input Start Stop M handling Gen Use Hoisting PID regul Network C output 11 Ref 1 channel Ref 1 channel Ref 1 channel Ref 1 channel Ref 1 channel PID Ref 2 channel reference Ref 1 channel integrated Modbus 1 12 No Summing ref 2 Summing ref 2 No PID feedback No Al3 No No No No No No AO1 No No No No No No R1 No drive flt No drive flt No drive flt No drive flt No drive flt No drive flt R2 No No No Brk control No No 111 2 wire Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward LI2 2 wire Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse LI3 2 wire No 2 preset speeds Jog Fault reset
130. the reference is set Thereference is acquired 100 ms after the rising edge of the request A new reference is not then acquired until a new request is made F Motor frequency MS Reference 0 LIx saved ae NER 100ms 100 11100 ms Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting APPLICATION FUNCT continued Sei MEMO REFERENCE SEN Ref memo ass No 0 Assignment to logic input Function active if the assigned input is at active state n D No O Not assigned L I L LH 1 Logical input LI1 C See the assignment conditions on page 138 51 28692 03 2010 173 Configuration Mode ConF FLUXING BY LOGIC INPUT Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 9 APPLICATION FUNCT continued je FLUXING BY LI TU Motor fluxing No n D A ADANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH When Motor fluxing L is set to Continuous the drive automatically builds up flux Q Check this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 1 CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage
131. the terminals Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop L FF Fallback spd L Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 r L 5 Spd maint L 5 The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred as long as the detected fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop Stop on ramp F SE Fast stop 5 Fast stop dL lI DCinjection 2 1 DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 148 1 Because in this case the detected fault does not trigger a stop it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output to its indication These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped si 242 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Parameter can be accessed in Expert mode Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FEE FAULT MANAGEMENT continued
132. world Alarm groups Frequency ref Output frequency Pulse in work freq Motor current Motor speed Motor voltage Motor power Motor torque Mains voltage Motor thermal state Drv thermal state Consumption Run time Power on time IGBT alarm counter Min freq time PID reference PID feedback PID error PID Output in V in V in mA in V in Hz parameter displayed in factory configuration in Hz in A parameter displayed in factory configuration in Hz in rpm in V in W as a in V as a as a in Wh or kWh depending on drive rating in hours length of time the motor has been switched on in hours length of time the drive has been switched on in seconds total time of IGBT overheating alarms in seconds as a as a as a in Hz Select the parameter s using ENT then appears next to the parameter Parameter s can also be deselected using ENT PARAMETER SELECTION MONITORING Examples include Display of 2 digital values RUN Term 35 0Hz 80 0A RUN Motor speed 1250 rpm Motor current 80A Display of 2 bar graphs Motor current Display of a list of 5 values 35 0Hz 80 0A RUN Term 35 0Hz 80 0A Motor speed max 1250 rpm 1500 1 2 MONITORING Frequency ref Motor current Motor speed Motor thermal state Drv thermal state These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has be
133. 0 500 Time ms Time in ms Time in ms Initial response Increase in SPG Increase SPG Reference division Reference division Reference division 1 1 1 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time ms Time in ms Time in ms 80 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting HE Ramp divider 0 to 10 4 Deceleration ramp time reduction See Ramp divider d page 158 IdL DC inject level 1 0 1 to 1 41 In 1 0 64 In 1 Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode See DC inject level 1 d C page 159 Q Eam DC injection time 1 0 1 to 30 s 0 5s Maximum current injection time DC inject level 1 d After this time the injection current becomes DC inject level 2 d 2 See DC injection time 1 d page 159 inject level 2 0 1 In to 1 41 In 1 0 5 In 1 Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode once period of time DC injection time 1 d has elapsed See DC inject level 2 d C 2 page 160 EAE DC injection time 2 0 1 to 30 s 0 5s Maximum injection time DC inject level 2 d 2 for injection selected as stop m
134. 0 Hz VIF profile setting This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type is set to V F 5pts UF 5 IE TE Current Limitation 0 to 1 5 In 1 1 5 In 1 RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR AND THE DRIVE Q Check that the motor will withstand this current particularly in the case of permanent magnet synchronous motors which are susceptible to demagnetization Check that the profile mission complies with the derating curve given in the installation manual Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage First current limitation Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss L fault mode if this has been enabled see page 238 If it is less than the no load motor current the motor cannot run GF te Switch freq type SFR type 1 HF 1 The motor switching frequency will be modified reduced when the internal temperature of the drive will be too high SFR type 1 1 Heating optimization Allows the system to adapt the switching frequency according to the motor frequency SER type 2 HF 2 Motor noise optimization for high switching frequency Allows the system to keep a constant chosen switching frequency Switching freq 5 F whatever the motor frequency Output frequency In the event of overheating the drive automatically decreases the switching frequency It is restored to its original value when the t
135. 00 ms 6 4 ms Accessible in Expert mode only Frequency to filter the estimated speed Cur ref filter time 0 to 100 ms 3 2 ms Accessible in Expert mode only Filter time of the current reference filter of control law if No O stator natural frequency IR compensation 0 to 20096 10096 Used to optimize torque at very low speed or to adapt to special cases for example for motors connected in parallel decrease Q IR compensation U F If there is insufficient torque at low speed increase IR compensation L F A too high value can avoid the motor to start locking or change the current limiting mode Sr Ip Slip compensation 0 to 30096 10096 This parameter cannot be accessed if Motor control type is set to Sync 5 This parameter is written at 0 when Motor control type is set to Quad U F 9 Adjusts the slip compensation around the value set by the rated motor speed The speeds given on motor nameplates are not necessarily exact o If slip setting is lower than actual slip The motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state but at a speed lower than the reference If slip setting is higher than actual slip The motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable ul 01 0 to 800 V according to rating 0 V VIF profile setting This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type is set to V F 5pts U F 5
136. 1 in the drive file 2 of graphic display terminal in this example 14 Put logic input LI Configurations n F 2 to 1 and leave logic input 2 Configurations C n F to 1 15 Download the configuration file 2 in the drive file 3 of graphic display terminal in this example Note Steps 6 7 14 et 15 are necessary only if MULTIMOTORS CONFIG N NE function is used with 3 configurations or 3 motors Graphic display terminal Current configuration CANopen amp Terminal 2 Configurations n F 1 Configurations L n F 2 CnF1 0 CnF2 0 CnF1 1 CnF2 0 CnF1 0 CnF2 1 or CnF1 1 2 1 Configuration 0 or motor 0 Configuration 1 or motor 1 Configuration 2 or motor 2 Switching command Depending on the number of motors or selected configurations 2 or 3 the switching command is sent using one or two logic inputs The table below lists the possible combinations 218 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Schematic diagram for multimotor mode LI LI Number of configurations 2 motors or configurations 3 motors or configurations or active motors 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 1 1 2 ATVeee i Configuration 0 if the 2 contacts are open Auto tuning in multimotor mode This auto tuning can be performed Configuration 1 Configuration 2 Manually using a logic inpu
137. 1 is a public unlock code 6969 PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support It can only be accessed in Expert P mode Only one PIN1 PIN2 code can be used the other must remain set to OFF Note When the unlock code is entered the user access code appears The following items are access protected e Return to factory settings FACTORY SETTINGS F 5 menu e The channels and parameters protected by the MY MENU N 4 1 as well as the menu itself The custom display settings 3 4 DISPLAY CONFIG d F menu Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting COd 5 PASSWORD GESIE State Unlocked U L Information parameter cannot be modified L E Locked L The drive is locked by a password ULC Unlocked U L The drive is not locked by a password PIN code 1 OFF to 9 999 OFF 1st access code The value OFF indicates that no password has been set Unlocked U L The value ON 2 n indicates that the drive is protected and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it Once the correct code has been entered it remains on the display and the drive is unlocked until the next time the power supply is disconnected PIN code 1 is a public unlock code 6969 COdc code 2 OFF to 9 999 OFF OFF
138. 1021 NOILLVOINnIWWOO e 114 LN3W39 VNVW 11 1 N N 19 S42018 141 aNvWWOO o71 549 SLNdLNO SLNdNII 103 1NO9 3010 135 59 1138 01 5 LLYVLS lt 747 uoneanBiyuoo oen 5 74 ISONILLAS ANOLOVA 4gu DNIMOLINOW 1 472 Index of Parameter Codes Code nuu f KEE MIEC nne NAJ nbrP nbEP nC 1 ale als pi ACS HEB nL1 n B ACAI mLHe nts ntHH nLH5 ntHB5 AER T nL RH ale 8 nL5 309 1 nfld any alls 1 1 28692 03 2010 CUSTOMER SETTING Index of Parameter Codes 4371 000 8882888 gs LO LO LO wo Lo INOILVOINNWWOD 41 SNE NES 114 eg 2 11 1 NIANI u34 S42018 NOIL NN 4 112 2 o71 549 SLNdLNO 1 i3 9B als ilg 103 1NOO 30101 135 ISONILLAS
139. 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting CUF nl SP Ld HLL Copy channel 1 lt gt 2 No n 1 A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Copying the command and or reference can change the direction of rotation Check that this is safe Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Can be used to copy the current reference and or the command by means of switching in order to avoid speed surges for example If Profile F page 139 is set to Not separ 5 7 or Separate 5 copying will only be possible from channel 1 to channel 2 If Profile C H E F is set to I O profile 5 copying will be possible in both directions A reference or a command cannot be copied to a channel on the terminals The reference copied is Frequency ref F H before ramp unless the destination channel reference is set via speed In this case the reference copied is Output frequency after ramp No O No copy Reference 5 P Copy reference Command Copy command ref AL L Copy command and reference These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description i
140. 3 201 Address of the 1st input word nAg Scan IN2 address 8 604 Address of the 2nd input word Scan IN3 address 0 Address of the 3rd input word Scan INA address 0 Address of the 4th input word 5 Scan IN5 address 0 Address of the 5th input word nflAG Scan IN6 address 0 Address of the 6th input word nA 1 Scan IN7 address 0 Address of the 7th input word 256 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Scan IN8 address 0 Address of the 8th input word COMMUNICATION continued 2115 Sj COM SCANNER OUTPUT Scan Puy address n C to Scan Out4 address C A could be used for Fast Task of the communication scanner see Modbus amp CANopen communication manual nLH Scan Out1 address 8 501 Address of the 1st output word Scan Out2 address 8 602 Address of the 2nd output word nLH3 Scan Out3 address 0 Address of the 3rd output word nLH 4 Scan Out4 address 0 Address of the 4th output word AAAS Scan Out5 address 0 Address of the 5th output word nLHB Scan Out6 address 0 Address of the 6th output word nLH Scan Out address 0 Address of the 7th output word nLHH Scan Out8 address 0 Address of the 8th output word
141. 3 2010 151 Configuration Mode ConF REFERENCE SWITCHING Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 9 Wing APPLICATION FUNCT rEF REFERENCE SWITCH i ET Ref 1B switching ch1 active 1 See the diagrams on pages 132 and 133 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 Ref 1 channel is active see Ref 1 channel 1 page 139 If the assigned input or bit is at 1 Ref 1B channel F 5 is active Ref 1B switching b is forced to ch1 active F if Profile C F is set to Not separ 5 7 with Ref 1 channel F assigned via the terminals analog inputs pulse input See Ref 1 channel F page 139 Fr I ch1 active F 1 No switching Ref 1 channel F 1 active Fr Ib ch1B active F Ib No switching Ref 1B channel Ib active L I L LI 1 1 Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 138 not Cd00 d to Cd15 d 15 Fr Ib Ref 1B channel No 1 n B O Not assigned A I 1 AH 1 Analog input A1 12 AI2 12 Analog input A2 AI3 13 Analog input L C C HMI Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal source I1 d b Modbus Integrated Modbus Hn CANopen A n Integrated CANopen n E E Com card E E Communication option board source P RP P 1 Pulse input A
142. 4 20 mA loss 0 to 1 36 In 1 0 Brake release current in the event of the loss of the weight sensor information This parameter can be accessed if the weight sensor is assigned to an analog current input and the 4 20 mA loss is deactivated Q Recommended settings Rated motor current for a hoisting application 1 corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 51 28692 03 2010 185 Configuration Mode ConF HIGH SPEED HOISTING This function can be used to optimize the cycle times for hoisting movements for zero or lightweight loads It authorizes operation at constant power in order to reach a speed greater than the rated speed without exceeding the rated motor current The speed remains limited by the High speed H 5 parameter page 75 The function acts on the speed reference pedestal and not on the reference itself Principle Frequency 4 High speed HSP Rated motor frequency FrS Torque max Rated motor frequency FrS High speed
143. 51 28692 Altivar 52 Variable speed drives for synchronous and asynchronous motors Programming Manual 03 2010 ENS ATV32HU15N4 250941101007 KW 2HP 380 500V 15 Schneider www schneider electric com The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication please notify us No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without express written permission of Schneider Electric All pertinent state regional and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this product For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system data only the manufacturer should perform repairs to
144. 692 03 2010 Reference Mode rEF Organization tree 1 Depending on the active reference channel Possible values A IU 1 LFr MF r P I F rH rc PE 2 2 s or ESC Displayed parameter value and unit of the diagram are given as examples e ESC O sL 0 o ENT ESC ENT JEE SHE r tle O 2 e Value Unit 51 28692 03 2010 39 Reference Mode rEF Menu Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting ial 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SPEED REFERENCE Displayed parameters depend on drive settings A IU Image input AIV1 0 to 100 of HSP LSP 096 First virtual Al value This parameter allows to modify the frequency reference with the embedded jog dial Q 1 IL JE x HMI Frequency ref 599 to 599 Hz 0 Hz HMI frequency reference signed value 9 This parameter allows to modify the frequency reference with the remote HMI 1 Multiplying coeff 0 to 100 100 Multiply frequency variable Multiplying coefficient can be accessed if Multiplier ref 7 A 2 78 3 page 154 has been assigned to the graphic terminal Q ele Internal PID ref 0 to 32 767 150 PID Internal reference PI This parameter allows to modify the PID internal reference with the jog dial Q Internal PID reference is visible if PID feedback F is not set to
145. 7 UPL OUTPUT PHASE LOSS 238 INPUT PHASE LOSS 238 OHL DRIVE OVERHEAT 239 SAE THERMAL ALARM STOP 240 EEF EXTERNAL FAULT 240 USb UNDERVOLTAGE MGT 241 E IGBT TESTS 242 4 20mA LOSS 242 InH FAULT INHIBITION 243 EE COM FAULT MANAGEMENT 243 TORQUE OR I LIM DETECT 245 FHF FREQUENCY METER 247 dLd DYNAMIC LOAD DETECT 248 EnF AUTO TUNING FAULT 249 PP CARDS PAIRING 250 ULd PROCESS UNDERLOAD 251 Old PROCESS OVERLOAD 253 LFF FALLBACK SPEED 253 FEE RAMP DIVIDER 254 DC INJECTION 254 230 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF From menu The parameters in the FAULT MANAGEMENT L menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and there is no run command except for parameters with a symbol in the code column which can be modified with the drive running or stopped 51 28692 03 2010 231 Configuration Mode ConF PTC probe 1 set of PTC probe can be managed by the drive in order to help to protect the motor on logic input LI6 converted for this use by switch SW2 on the control block The PTC probe is monitored for the following detected faults Motor overheating Sensor break Sensor short circuit Protection via PTC probe does not disable protection via 4 calculation performed by the drive the two types of protection can be combined Source SW1 Sink ext Sink int L
146. 70m 45m 105 m 85m 65m 50m 40m 30m ATV32HU15N4 1 5 2 15 14 100 m 70m 45m 105 m 85m 65m 50m 40m 30m ATV32HU22N4 22 3 185 14 110m 65m 45m 105 m 85m 65m 50m 40m 30m ATV32HU30NA 3 1 5 14 110m 65m 45m 105 m 85m 65m 50m 40m 30m ATV32HU40N4 4 5 2 5 12 110m 65m 45m 105 m 85m 65m 50m 40m 30m ATV32HU55NA 5 5 75 4 10 120m 65m 45m 105 m 85m 65m 50m 40m 30m ATV32HU75N4 7 5 10 6 8 120m 65m 45m 105 m 85m 65m 50m 40m 30m ATV32HD11N4 11 15 10 8 115m 60m 45m 100 m 75m 55m 50m 40m 30m ATV32HD15N4 15 20 16 6 105 m 60m 40m 100 m 70m 50m 50m 40m 30m For 230 400 V motors used at 230 V the Motor surge limit 5 U L parameter can remain set to 0 108 51 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Uber Braking level 335 to 820 V According to drive rating voltage Braking transistor command level IL 1518 Load sharing No 5 0 When 2 motors are connected mechanically and therefore at the same speed and each is controlled by a drive this function can be used to improve torque distribution between the two motors To do this it varies the speed based on the torque This parameter can only be accessed if Motor control type page 92 is set to SVC V LU UL n E No 5 B Function inactive 5 Yes 5 Function active ll 5 JE Load correction 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz Rated correction in Hz This parameter can be accesse
147. AMETERS Internal parameters available for the user program nog 0 to 65 535 0 1 001 Parameter saved EEprom nguge 0 to 65 535 0 1 M002 Parameter saved in EEprom nagu3 0 to 65 535 0 1 M003 Parameter saved EEprom 0 to 65 535 0 1 M004 Parameter saved EEprom nogs 0 to 65 535 0 1 005 Parameter written in RAM noosa 0 to 65 535 0 1 006 Parameter written in RAM 0 to 65 535 0 1 M007 Parameter written in RAM 0 to 65 535 0 1 M008 Parameter written RAM 1 If a graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9 999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit for example 15 65 for 15 650 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped el T 2s Tochange the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2 s 146 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF APPLICATION FUNCT Un Summary of functions Code Name Page FEF REFERENCE SWITCH 152 OA 1
148. Acceleration 2 0 00 to 6 000 s 2 5 0s Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor 5 To have repeatability in ramps the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application Q This parameter be accessed if Ramp 2 threshold F is greater than 0 or if Ramp switch ass 5 is assigned 1 dEg Deceleration 2 0 00 to 6 000 s 2 50s Time to decelerate from Rated motor freq F 5 to 0 To have repeatability in ramps the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application Q This parameter be accessed if Ramp 2 threshold F is greater than 0 or if Ramp switch ass P 5 is assigned 1 156 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting lei ie nl Dec ramp adapt Yes 5 CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Choose only Dec ramp adapt 5 Yes 5 or No a D if the motor is a permanent magnet synchronous motor otherwise it will be demagnetized Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp if this has been set at a too low value according to the inertia of the load which can cause an overvoltage detected fault Dec ramp adapt 5 is forced
149. COM FAULT MANAGEMENT Network fault mgt Freewheel 5 A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL If Network fault management Network fault mgt L L is set to Ignore O communication control will be inhibited For safety reasons inhibiting the communication interruption detection should be restricted to the debug phase or to special applications Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication interruption with a communication card nO Ignore O Detected fault ignored YE 5 Freewheel 5 Freewheel stop SEE STT 5 E Stop according to configuration of Type of stop 5 page 158 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel for example according to 2 3 wire control and 2 wire type page 112 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop L F F Fallback spd L Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 r L 5 Spd L 5 The drive maintains the speed being applied whe
150. Configuration Mode ConF Settings With integrated display terminal DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that changes made to the settings during operation do not present any danger We recommend stopping the drive before making any changes Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury From F menu The adjustment parameters can be modified with the drive running or stopped 76 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting fe TETTE TE FULL continued EE SETTINGS Inr Ramp increment 0 1 Q This parameter is valid for Acceleration A LC Deceleration d Acceleration 2 2 and Deceleration 2 d 2 See Ramp increment n r page 155 0 0 1 0 01 Ramp up to 99 99 seconds 0 0 1 Ramp up to 999 9 seconds 1 1 Ramp up to 6 000 seconds SHE IE Acceleration 0 00 to 6 000 s 1 3 0s Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq 5 page 74 To have repeatability in ramps the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application See Acceleration page 155 Deceleration 0 00 to 6 000 s 1 3 0s Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq 5 page 74
151. DC bus precharging contactor control OLO I OLO1 UL O 1 Function blocks Logical Output 01 HL UL 10 Function blocks Logical Output 10 dO Id DO1 delay time 0 to 60 000 ms 1 0 ms The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt F L Brk control 5 L Output cont O E and Input cont L L E assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true malit JI DO active at 1 05 Configuration of the operating logic 1 P O 5 State 1 when the information is true n E LE 0 n E D State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 0 5 cannot be modified for the No drive flt L Brk control b L and Input cont L L assignments dO IH DO1 holding time 0 to 9 999 ms 0 ms The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt F L Brk control 5 L and Input cont L L assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false 1 0 to 9 999 ms then 10 00 to 60 00 s on the integrated display terminal 126 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Configuration of analog output Minimum and maximum values output values The minimum output value in volts corresponds to the lower limit of the assigned parameter and the maximum value corresponds
152. Detected fault ignored YE 5 Freewheel 5 Freewheel stop SEE STT 5 E E Stop according to configuration of Type of stop 5 E page 158 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel for example according to 2 3 wire control and 2 wire type page 112 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop L F F fallback spd L F F Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 r L 5 Spd maint L 5 The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred as long as the detected fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop Stop on ramp F SE Fast stop 5 E Fast stop dL I DC injection d E 1 DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 150 SELD Trq l limit time out 0 to 9 999 ms 1 000 ms 19 If trip has been configured Time delay for taking SSF limitation into account 1 Because in this case the detected fault does not trigger a stop it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output to its
153. Drive lock Line contact ctrl L 5 Emergency stop Er Init traverse ctrl Reload traverse control 5 nL Counter wobble 5 Counter wobble synchronization Prod reset P A Reset Product 5 2 HSP 5 High Speed 2 5 4 HSP 5 High Speed 4 I LO1 L H 1 Logical output LO1 L R1 1 Relay R1 R2 Relay R2 90 1 001 90 1 Analog logical output DO1 b E UC Bth visibilit b E UC Bluetooth visibility Ir connection O Operation with reversible unit 100 Jog F 100 Function key jog assignment FPS Preset spd2 F P 5 I Function key preset speed 1 assignment Preset spd3 F P 5 2 Function key preset speed 2 assignment X 114 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FPr I PIDref 2 F Pr 1 Function key preset 1 assignment Pr PID ref 3 F P 2 Function key preset 2 assignment F USP Speed LU 5 P Function key faster assignment F d 5P Speed F d 5 P Function key slower assignment F E T K Function key bumpless assignment US around ref L 5 Speed around ref d5 1 around 25 Speed around ref ILE 11 101 L O 1 Function blocks Logical Inpu
154. E 5 Function block stop detected error I Out contact stuck F 7 Output contactor closed contactor FE F 2 Out contact open 2 Output contactor opened contactor HE F Cards pairing H F Hardware configuration detected error IGBT desaturation F Hardware detected error IL F Option int link L Option internal link interruption Rating error F 1 Unknown drive rating In 2 PWR Calib n F 2 Unknown or incompatible power board In F J Int serial link 5 F 3 Internal serial link communication interruption ln F 4 Int Mfg area F Invalid industrialization zone Internal option F Unknown or incompatible option board F 9 Internal I measure F 8 Current measurement circuit detected error F A Internal mains circuit n Input phase loss circuit detected error F b Internal th sensor F b Thermal sensor detected error or SC In F E Internal CPU F E CPU detected fault ram flash task L E F Input contactor L Line contactor detected error L AI3 4 20mA loss L F F 3 4 20 mA loss Overbraking 0 b F Overbraking OC F Overcurrent F Overcurrent Drive overheat Drive overheating OL C Proc Overload Fit O L C Torque overload OL Motor overload O L Motor overload
155. F Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting U IH 2 max value 0 to 10 0 V 10 0 V Al2 voltage scaling parameter of 100 lal die 12 filter 0 to 10 00 s 05 Interference filtering lal hele Al2 Interm point X 0 to 100 0 Input delinearization point coordinate Percentage of the physical input signal 0 corresponds to Min value if the range is 0 100 Max value Min value 2 100 corresponds to Max value 0 corresponds to if the range is 100 10090 i les iE AI2 Interm point Y 0 to 10096 096 Output delinearization point coordinate frequency reference Percentage of the internal frequency reference corresponding to the AI2 Interm point X 2 E percentage of physical input signal INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG continued AI3 CONFIGURATION lal TESTIS assignment Identical to assignment A page 120 Type Voltage o OU Current 5 0 20 mA IE m IE min value 0 to 20 0 mA 0 mA Al3 current scaling parameter of 0 AI3 max value 0 to 20 0 mA 20 0 mA current scaling parameter of 100 ATIF filter 0 to 10 00 s 0s Interference filtering lal TAIN nEL range 0 100 P O 5 0 100 P 05 Unidirectional input 100
156. I6 SW2 Code Name Description FULL continued FAULT MANAGEMENT PTC MANAGEMENT Adjustment range Factory setting PECE nl H5 ip rel Pe PLES CSES LI6 PTC probe No n 0 Check first that the switch SW2 on the control block is set to PTC No 5 Not used Always A 5 PTC probe are monitored permanently even if the power supply is not connected as long as the control remains connected to the power supply Power ON d 5 PTC probe are monitored while the drive power supply is connected Motor 5 PTC probe are monitored while the motor power supply is connected FAULT MANAGEMENT continued FAULT RESET ip Sle Fault reset No n 0 Detected faults are cleared manually when the assigned input or bit changes to 1 if the cause of the detected fault has disappeared The STOP RESET key on the graphic display terminal performs the same function Following detected faults can be cleared manually ASF br CaF COF dLF EPF EPF 5 dumb eee Ler BEF BHF OLC HL BRE er PEP L SEEPS SLE 51 55 and O Function inactive LI1 L Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 138 232 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration M
157. IL 1 Al virtual 1 Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial only available if Profile HL F is not set to Not separ 5 7 I OA01 550 I Function blocks Analog Output 01 HH OA10 OA 10 Function blocks Analog Output 10 152 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF REFERENCE OPERATIONS Summing input Subtracting input Multiplier Fr1 or Frib 34 SA2 SA3 dA2 4 dA3 MA2 3 Fr1 or 1 SA2 SA3 dA2 dA3 x MA2 x I 5H3 dA 3 are not assigned they set to 0 are not assigned they are set to 1 Ais limited by the minimum L 5 P and maximum H 5 P parameters e For multiplication the signal on 2 or 3 is interpreted as a 100 corresponds to the maximum value of the corresponding input If 2 or 3 is sent via the communication bus or graphic display terminal an multiplication variable page 266 must be sent via the bus or graphic display terminal Reversal of the direction of operation in the event of a negative result can be inhibited see RV Inhibition 5 page 139 Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting APPLICATION FUNCT continued di REF OPERATIONS Reference Fr1 or Frib SA2 SA3 dA2 dA3 x MA2 x MAS See the diagrams on pages 132 and 133 Note This
158. IP b ELE 142 bas bnU zx Ko N ES T ES N Ko ES N m N lex ki ks T 1 brH E 1 gt N En o N brH i 4 4 brr E N lt br 88 ES ES Ko BSE 1 9 N I N bEUA N bUEr 49 143 EEFG 74 CES 140 Ed 140 zx Luc 140 CFG 70 23 302 1 28692 03 2010 Index of Parameter Codes CUSTOMER SETTING 4371 wo 282 002 NOILVOINnIWWOO 114 11 1 244 wo wo N N e wo e 154 e 19 S42018 ise 112 aNvWWOO o71 549 SLNdLNO SLNANII
159. IP mire F2 key assignment No 0 Identical to F1 key assignment F page 142 F3 key assignment No n 0 Identical to F1 key assignment page 142 Em4 F4 key assignment n 0 Identical to F1 key assignment page 142 HMl Stop 5 When the T K function is assigned to a key and that function is active this parameter defines the behavior at the moment when control returns to the graphic display terminal or remote display terminal 5 Stop 5 E Stops the drive although the controlled direction of operation and reference of the previous channel are copied to be taken into account on the next RUN command b UNF Bumpless 4 U N F Does not stop the drive the controlled direction of operation and the reference of the previous channel are copied These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 142 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Function Block Management Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting e TTE TE FULL continued FUNCTION BLOCKS HFb MONIT FUN BLOCKS Note Thi
160. Identical to Past fault 1 J P page 58 d RA Past fault 8 Identical to Past fault 1 J P 1 page 58 60 S1A28692 03 2010 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Name Description Unit mimis DIAGNOSTICS continued EE CURRENT FAULT LIST n OF No fault No detected fault memorized ASF Angle error A 5 Angle setting detected fault Brake control 5 L Brake s motor 3 phases loss F Brake feedback b Brake contactor detected error C FF Incorrect config F F Invalid configuration at power on Bad conf 12 Configuration transfer detected error nF Com network NET option communication interruption OF CAN CANopen communication interruption Capa charg Load relay detected fault C SF Ch sw fault 5 F Channel switching detected error dC F fault F Differential current detected fault dL F Load fault d L Dynamic load detected error EEF I Control EEprom E E F 1 Control EEprom detected error E E F 2 Power Eeprom E F 2 Power EEprom detected error External fault LI Bit E P F External detected fault from LI or local link E PF 2 External fault com 2 External interruption from communication board F b E FB fault Function block detected error F b E 5 stop F b
161. LIid3 COM card cmd Communication card command word image COMMUNICATION MAP continued l FREQ REF WORD MAP Frequency reference image Only accessible via graphic display terminal LFr Modbus ref Hz Modbus frequency reference image L Feed CANopen ref Hz CANopen frequency reference image LFr3 Com card ref Hz Communication card frequency reference image CAM COMMUNICATION MAP continued fao CANopen MAP CANopen image Only accessible via graphic display terminal L Un RUN LED View of the CANopen RUN Led Status CAnE ERR LED View of the CANopen Error Led Status PO 1 PDO1 IMAGE View of the RPDO1 and TPDO1 rP Received PDO1 1 First frame of the received PDO1 51 28692 03 2010 53 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Name Description Unit rP 2 Received PDO1 2 Second frame of the received PDO1 rP 14 Received PDO1 3 Third frame of the received PDO1 rP 4 Received PDO1 4 Fourth frame of the received PDO1 I Transmit PDO1 1 First frame of the transmit PDO1 I Transmit PDO1 2 Second frame of the transmit PDO1 13 Transmit PDO1 3 Third frame of the transmit PDO1 EP IH Transmit PDO1 4 Fourth frame of the transmit PDO1 011 CANopen MAP continued CANopen image Only acce
162. MS APPLICATION FUNCT REF OPERATIONS RAMP STOP CONFIGURATION AUTO DC INJECTION Note The protected parameters are no longer accessible and are not therefore displayed for the selected channels 51 28692 03 2010 273 Interface ItF Code PAL ip Pod Name Description PARAMETER ACCESS PROTECTION PROTECTED CHANNELS Factory setting UERS E On HMI Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal P 5 Tool P 5 PC Software N d b Modbus d b Integrated Modbus Hn CANopen A n Integrated CANopen amp n E E Com card n Communication card if inserted VISIBILITY Q PARAMETERS Parameter visibility only active ones or all parameters RE E Active AL E ALL AI ALL Active Q Parameter that can be modified during operation when stopped 51428692 03 2010 Interface ItF Keypad parameters RDY Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A KEYPAD PARAMETERS Keypad contrast Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Ent KEYPAD PARAMETERS IE iP ms Keypad contrast 0 to 10096 5096 Contrast of the keypad 564 Keypad stand by No n 5 to 10 5 min Graphic keypad standby delay n E 0 No 9 Parameter that can be modified during opera
163. NGS Ramp increment PARAM SET SWITCHING continued P51 SET 1 This parameter can be accessed if at least 1 parameter has been selected PARAMETER SELECTION Making an entry in this parameter opens a settings window containing the selected parameters in the order in which they were selected With the graphic display terminal Acceleration Acceleration Deceleration 5 101 Acceleration 2 9 51 S Deceleration 2 BENE Begin Acc round i 999 9 With the integrated display terminal Proceed as in the Settings menu using the parameters that appear MER PARAM SET SWITCHING continued P5g SET 2 This parameter can be accessed if at least 1 parameter has been selected PARAMETER SELECTION Q Identical to SET 1 P 5 page 215 IT Siculis 51 28692 03 2010 215 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting MLP PARAM SET SWITCHING continued P53 SET 3 This parameter can be accessed if 3 parameter sets H A 2 is not No O and if atleast 1 parameter has been selected in PARAMETER SELECTION Q Identical to SET 1 5 page 215 STAN These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the c
164. Name Description IHE MY MENU CONFIG 272 1 28692 03 2010 Interface ItF Parameter access RDY Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A PARAMETER ACCESS PROTECTION Term 0 0Hz VISIBILITY VISIBILITY Term 0 0 Hz PARAMETERS Selection to display all parameters or only the m Quick active parameters Press ESC to exit this Screen a You remain exclusively ENT i 1 1 SPEED REFERENCE in the 1 DRIVE MENU 12 MONITORING menu All menus are 1 3 CONFIGURATION selected by default Press ENT to deselect a menu py Ton OT Press ENT to reselect a PROTECTION ENT menu PROTECTED CHANNELS RDY Term 0 0 2 00 Note The protected channel or channels must be PROTECTED PARAMS PROTECTED CHANNELS selected as a protected parameter on a selected channel remains accessible on the channels that are not selected PC TOOL MODBUS CANopen COM CARD Code Quick In these screens parameters in the 1 DRIVE MENU menu 1 1 SPEED REFERENCE TO MONIRORINS can be protected and are 4 3 CONFIGURATION 1 3 CONFIGURATION displayed for selection MY MENU except for the Expert FACTORY SETTINGS parameters Macro configuration FULL Press the All key to select all the parameters Press the All key again to deselect all the No selections can be made in this parameters screen if there are no parameters PROTECTED PARA
165. No 1 FeH Frequency ref 599 to 599 Hz Frequency reference before ramp signed value Actual frequency reference applied to the motor regardless of which reference channel has been selected This parameter is in read only mode Frequency reference is visible if the command channel is not HMI or virtual Al m fgg PID reference 0 to 65 535 PID Setpoint value PID reference is visible if PID feedback F is not set to No 2 1 It is not necessary to press the ENT key to confirm the modification of the reference These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 40 S1A28692 04 2010 Monitoring Mode MOn Monitoring Mode MOn What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Introduction 42 Organization tree 43 Menu 44 51 28692 03 2010 41 Monitoring Mode MOn Introduction The parameters can be accessed when the drive is running or stopped Some functions have numerous parameters In order to clarify programming and avoid having to scroll through endless parameters thes
166. No n 0 Selection of a reference to be subtracted from Ref 1 channel F or Ref 1B channel F Ib Identical to Summing ref 2 5 2 page 153 nne Multiplier ref 2 No 0 Selection of a multiplier reference Ref 1 channel F 1 or Ref 1B channel Identical to Summing ref 2 5 2 page 153 nAg Multiplier ref 3 No 1 Selection of a multiplier reference Ref 1 channel 1 or Ref 1B channel 1b Identical to Summing ref 2 5 2 page 153 154 51 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF RAMP Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting IP flu APPLICATION FUNCT continued RAMP Ramp type Linear L In L In Linear L 5 S ramp 5 U ramp CUS Customized U 5 Q S ramps f Hz f Hz FrS Frs The rounding coefficient is fixed t1 0 6 set ramp time linear t2 0 4 set ramp time round 2451 Hg A t3 1 4 set ramp time The rounding coefficient is fixed t1 2 0 5 set ramp time linear t2 1 0 set ramp time round t3 1 5 set ramp time Customized ramps f Hz tA1 adjustable from 0 to 100 tA2 adjustable from 0 to 100 tA1 tA3 adjustable from 0 to 100 6 tA4 adjustable from 0 to 10096 tA3 t ls t34 t12 ACC tA1 100 tA2 100 1 t34 DEC tA3
167. O Autotune will be performed every time the power will be switched on Check this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way 25 Failure to follow these instructions will result death or serious injury The motor must be stopped when switching on the drive Automatic autotune U is forced to Yes 5 if Auto tuning usage L is set to Cold tun The value of motor statoric resistance measured during the tune is used to estimate the thermal state of the motor at power up n E No 2 Function deactivated 5 Yes 5 A tune is automatically done at each power up Saliency mot state for information only cannot be modified Information on synchronous motor saliency This parameter can be accessed if Tune selection 5 is set to Measure N E A 5 Note In case of motor with low saliency the standard control law is advised n O a 2 Tune not done LL Low salient L L 5 Low saliency level Recommended configuration Angle setting type A 5 PSI align P 5 PSIO align P 5 HJ and HF inj activation No o D 5 Med salient 5 Medium saliency level Angle setting type A 5 SPM align 5 P 7 RH is possible HF inj activation HF Yes 5 could work HL 5 High salient H L 5 High saliency level Angle setting type A 5 IPM align P
168. OLON 2 e 335 soNILL3S 01 5 LLYVLS A1dMWis 757 oen 5 74 ISONILLAS ANOLOVA DNIMOLINOW 1 472 Code EL IL EL BTS EDS Id Ig BP laa 1 Ege EP es EPZ BP a i ER EP a4 ET E95 ErH E EE bd EEL E Un EUP EUS 1 28692 03 2010 316 Index of Parameter Codes CUSTOMER SETTING 4371 39 V3 1 NI LB 3 NOILLVOINnIWWO2 774 11 1 N 241 o U94 S42018 NOIL NN 4 112 aNvWWOO 71 549 SLNdLNO 1 pa lt es P INOYLNOSD YOLON wo peed wo lt 135 59 1138 01 5 LLYVLS lt 757 oen 5 74 ISONILLAS ANOLOVA 4gu DNIMOLINOW 1 4372 Code
169. OW 1 472 Code PIPS 15 PUL 5 Pre Pry PrP P5 P52 P54 P58 P5r PSE PECL PEH 15 45H q5L Id IH 5 eet res 1 rer IL In PP le 311 51 28692 03 2010 Index of Parameter Codes CUSTOMER SETTING 4371 02 NOILVOINnIWWO2 114 LN3W39 VNVW LNV e e N N feci wo H o pid ite N x wo N x wo e x wo N wo 19 S42018 112 2 o71 549 SLNdLNO s1ndNi lt lt 103 1NOO 310LOW ied 335 59 1138 01 5 LLYVLS lt 757 oen 5 74 ISONILLAS ANOLOVA DNIMOLINOW 1 472 Code VS rPe
170. PROM Therefore the next time the drive starts up the speed reference is the last reference saved O No save the next time the drive starts up the speed reference is Low speed L 5 see page 75 RAM Saved in RAM EEprom E P Saved in EEPROM These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 170 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF SPEED AROUND A REFERENCE The reference is given by Ref 1 channel or Ref 1B channel F Ib with summing subtraction multiplication functions and preset speeds if relevant see the diagram on page 132 For improved clarity we will call this reference A The action of the speed and speed keys can be set as a of this reference On stopping the reference A speed is not saved so the drive restarts with reference only The maximum total reference is limited by High speed H 5 P and the minimum reference by Low speed 1 5 P see page 75 Example of 2 wire control Acceleration 2 AL 2 Motor frequency SrP 4 Reference A SrP 4 4 LSP 4 LSP SPY Reference 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EE 1
171. Preset speed 10 0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz Preset speed 10 See the Combination table for preset PID references page 192 1 Preset speed 11 0 to 599 Hz 55 Hz Preset speed 11 See the Combination table for preset PID references page 192 1 SP 2 Preset speed 12 0 to 599 Hz 60 Hz Preset speed 12 See the Combination table for preset PID references page 192 1 SP 13 Preset speed 13 0 to 599 Hz 70 Hz Preset speed 13 See the Combination table for preset PID references page 192 1 SP 4 Preset speed 14 0 to 599 Hz 80 Hz Preset speed 14 See the Combination table for preset PID references page 192 1 Sle nt Preset speed 15 0 to 599 Hz 90 Hz Preset speed 15 See the Combination table for preset PID references page 192 1 ole Preset speed 16 0 to 599 Hz 100 Hz Preset speed 16 The appearance of these Preset speed x 5 Px parameters is determined by the number of speeds configured See the Combination table for preset PID references page 192 51 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Skip Frequency 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz Skip frequency This parameter helps to prevent prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency This function can be used to help to prevent a critical speed which would cause resonance being reached Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive
172. R1 CONFIGURATION continued ip dra 1 R1 Delay time 0 to 60 000 ms 0 ms The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt L assignment and remains at 0 Pos nEG R1 Active at Configuration of the operating logic 1 P O 5 State 1 when the information is true 0 E 5 State 0 when the information is true Configuration 1 0 5 cannot be modified for the No drive flt F L assignment 1 POS 51 28692 03 2010 123 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting R1 Holding time 0 to 9 999 ms 0 ms The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt L assignment and remains at 0 Iu INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG continued re R2 CONFIGURATION R2 Assignment No n 0 Identical to R1 Assignment page 123 with the addition of b L E Brk control 5 L Brake contactor control LLC Input cont L L Line contactor control OCC Output cont Output contactor control E b 0 End reel End of reel traverse control function E 54 Sync wobble
173. SER PARAMETERS Factory setting GSF Q nl 5 Return std name Display standard parameters instead of customised ones No 5 D Yes 5 No 5 0 MY MENU E fg im DIEN DEVICE NAME SERVICE MESSAGE SHUD LINE 1 STE OZ LINE 2 umb LINE 3 LINE 4 SEES LINE 5 CONFIGURATION 0 E TE fiti CONFIGURATION 1 E 2 igi fay CONFIGURATION 2 Sit SERIAL NUMBER Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 51 28692 03 2010 271 Interface ItF My Menu config Selection of parameters ENT included in the user menu PARAMETER SELECTION FULL Note The ist ine is SETTINGS ENT PARAMETER MOTOR CONTROL SETTINGS SELECTION or INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Ramp increment RDY Term 0 0 Hz 0 0 A COMMAND Acceleration depending the path ENT Acceleration 2 or List RDY Term 0 0Hz 00 PARAMETER SELECTION SELECTED LIST Deceleration 2 Parameter list making up the List user menu ENT RDY Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A SELECTED LIST Ramp increment Acceleration Deceleration 2 Use the F2 and F3 keys to arrange the parameters in the list example below using F3 RDY Term 0 0Hz 0 0 SELECTED LIST Acceleration Ramp increment Code
174. Separate 5 or I O profile 2 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 channel Cmd channel 1 d 1 is active If the assigned input or bit is at 1 channel channel 2 d 2 is active 1 channel F 1 channel 1 1 active no switching Ref 2 channel channel 2 active no switching L I LH 1 Logical input 11 See the assignment conditions on page 138 not JOD to 15 Fire Ref 2 channel No 0 n No O Not assigned If Profile F is set to Not separ 5 the command is at the terminals with a zero reference If Profile F is set to Separate 5 E P or I O profile O the reference is zero 1 Analog input 1 2 AI2 A 12 Analog input A2 13 13 Analog input UP dE U FP d E speed command L E E HMI Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal Modbus Integrated Modbus Hn A n Integrated CANopen n E E Com card E Communication card if inserted P RP P 1 Pulse input A IU 1 virtual 1 1 Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial I OAO1 HR H 1 Function blocks Analog Output 01 HH 10 OA10 10 Function blocks Analog Output 10 140 1
175. TIBILITY The function can t be assigned because an incompatible function is already selected See programming book ENT or ESC to continue With the integrated display terminal and the remote display terminal COMP flashes until ENT or ESC is pressed When you assign a logic input an analog input a reference channel or a bit to a function pressing the HELP key will display the functions that may already have been activated by this input bit or channel When a logic input an analog input a reference channel or a bit that has already been assigned is assigned to another function the following screens appear With the graphic display terminal RUN Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A WARNING ASSIGNED TO Forward ENT Valid ESC Abort If the access level permits this new assignment pressing ENT confirms the assignment If the access level does not permit this new assignment pressing ENT results in the following display RUN Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A ASSIGNMENT FORBIDDEN Un assign the present functions or select Advanced access level With the integrated display terminal The code for the first function which is already assigned is displayed flashing If the access level permits this new assignment pressing ENT confirms the assignment If the access level does not permit this new assignment pressing ENT has no effect and the message continues to flash It is only possible to exit by pressing ESC 51 28692 0
176. TRIC SHOCK OR ARC FLASH During auto tuning the motor operates at rated current Do not service the motor during auto tuning Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL e is essential that the following parameters Nominal I sync n r 5 Nom motor spdsync n 5 P 5 Pole pairs P P n 5 Syn EMF constant H 5 Autotune L d axis L d 5 and Autotune L q axis L 9 5 are correctly configured before starting auto tuning When one or more of these parameters have been changed after auto tuning has been performed Auto tuning U n will return No action O and the procedure will have to be repeated Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Auto tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated If a freewheel stop or fast stop function has been assigned to a logic input this input must be set to 1 active at 0 Auto tuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands which will be taken into account after the auto tuning sequence If auto tuning detects a fault the drive displays No action 7 and depending on the configuration of Autotune fault mgt n L page 249 may switch to Auto tuning n F fault mode Auto tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds Do not interrupt the process Wait for the display to change to No action
177. TV32 Atex manual S1A45605 ATV32 Safety manual 51 45606 ATV32 other option manuals see www schneider electric com You can download the latest versions of these technical publications and other technical information from our website at www schneider electric com 8 1 28692 04 2010 About the Book Product related information ADANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Read and understand this manual before installing or operating the Altivar 32 drive Installation adjustment repair and maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel Theuseris responsible for compliance with all international and national electrical code requirements with respect to grounding of all equipment Many parts of this drive including the printed circuit boards operate at the line voltage DO NOT TOUCH Use only electrically insulated tools DO NOT touch unshielded components or terminal strip screw connections with voltage present DO NOT short across terminals PA and PC or across the DC bus capacitors Before servicing the drive Disconnect all power including external control power that may be present Place a DO NOT TURN label on all power disconnects Lock all power disconnects in the open position WAIT 15 MINUTES to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge Measure the voltage of the DC bus between the PA and PC terminals to ensure that the voltage is less than 42 Vac
178. Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SPEED REFERENCE 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 CONFIGURATION 26 1 28692 03 2010 Overview Powering up the drive for the first time With the integrated display terminal when powering up the drive for the first time the user immediately accesses to Standard mot freq 5 F see page 74 in the menu COnF gt FULL gt SIM Schneider Display after the drive has been powered up for the first time Electric ATV32HU15M2 1 5kW 2HP 220V Single Config n 0 1 3 seconds Term 0 0 2 0 0 ACCESS LEVEL The ACCESS LEVEL screen follows automatically Y ENT 1 DRIVE MENU Automatically switches to the 1 DRIVE MENU menu after 3 seconds 1 1 SPEED REFERENCE Select the menu and press ENT 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 CONFIGURATION Y ESC WAIN MENU The MAIN MENU appears on the graphic display terminal if you press the ESC key 1 DRIVE MENU 2 IDENTIFICATION 3 INTERFACE 4 OPEN SAVE AS 5 PASSWORD 51 28692 03 2010 27 Overview Subsequent power ups With the integrated display terminal at subsequent power ups of the drive for the first time the user immediately accesses to the drive state Same liste than Drive state H 5 page 59 Example Ready rdY Schneider Display after powering up Electric ATV32HU15M2 1 5kW 2HP 220V Single Config n 0 1 3 seconds RDY Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A Automatically switches to the 1 DRIVE MENU menu afte
179. This parameter can only be accessed in Expert P mode 2nd access code The value OFF indicates that no password has been set Unlocked U L The value ON indicates that the drive is protected and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it Once the correct code has been entered it remains on the display and the drive is unlocked until the next time the power supply is disconnected PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support When PIN code 2 set to OFF 1 2 MONITORING menu is the only one visible Then if PIN code 2 is set to OFF drive unlocked all menus are visible If the display settings are modified in 3 4 DISPLAY CONFIG d F menu and if PIN code 2 O d 2 is not set to OFF the visibility configured is kept Then if PIN code 2 is set to OFF drive unlocked the visibility configured in 3 4 DISPLAY CONFIG d F menu is kept T Upload rights Permitted UL 0 Reads or copies the current configuration to the drive UL c 0 Permitted O The current drive configuration can be uploaded to the graphic display terminal or PC Software HL r I Notallowed UL 1 The current drive configuration can only be uploaded to the graphic display terminal or PC Sofware if the drive is not protected by an access code or if the correct code has bee
180. Wh Energy consumption in Wh kWh or MWh accumulated consumption iP l Run time s min Run elapsed time display resetable in seconds minutes or hours length of time the motor has been switched on Power on time s min h Power elapsed time display in seconds minutes or hours length of time the drive has been switched on Operating t reset Reset of run elapsed time n EU B Reset operation not in progress HP H Reset kWh A P H Clear Reset kWh A P r EH rst runtime E H Clear rst runtime E H rst POnt Clear On NOn 1 2 MONITORING continued LnF5 Config active View of the active configuration n In progress O Transitory state configuration changing L nF B Config n 0 n F O Configuration 0 active CaF Config n 1 nF 1 Configuration 1 active L n F Config n 2 E F 2 Configuration 2 active CFPS J Utilised param set Configuration parameter status can be accessed if parameter switching has been enabled see page 214 n 0 None O Not assigned I Set 1 CF P 1 Parameter set 1 active CF P Set 2 E F P 2 Parameter set 2 active C F P J Set 3 E F P 3 Parameter set active 56 1 28692 03 2010 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Name Description Unit
181. actor to close is made when a run command is sent The request for the contactor to open is made when there is no longer any current in the motor CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR If a DC injection braking function has been configured it should not be left operating too long in stop mode as the contactor only opens at the end of braking Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Output contactor feedback The corresponding logic input should be at 1 when there is no run command and at 0 during operation In the event of an inconsistency the drive trips in FCF2 if the output contactor fails to close LIx at 1 and in if it is stuck LIx at 0 The Delay to motor run d b 5 parameter can be used to delay tripping in fault mode when a run command is sent and the Delay to open cont d A 5 parameter delays the detected fault when a stop command is set Note FCF2 contactor failing to close can be reset by the run command changing state from 1 to 0 0 gt 1 gt 0 in 3 wire control The Out contactor ass and Output contact fdbk functions be used individually together 51 28692 03 2010 207 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting I APPLICATION FUNCT continued iE OUTPUT CONTACTOR CMD Ii qr Out
182. age 100 EUS Auto tuning state Not done A b This parameter is not saved at drive power off It shows the Autotuning status since last power on See Auto tuning state 5 page 95 E Hb Not done A b Autotune is not done PE nd Pending n d Autotune has been requested but not yet performed 00 In Progress P Autotune is in progress FH IL Failed F A 11 Autotune has detected a fault 20 nE Done d O n The stator resistance measured by the auto tuning function is used to control the motor Uf fa Tune selection Default E A 5 See Tune selection 5 page 95 E Ab Default A b The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor NE AS Measure 5 The stator resistance measured by the auto tuning function is used to control the motor CUS Custom 1 5 The stator resistance set manually is used to control the motor IEH Mot therm current 0 2 to 1 5 In 1 According to drive rating Q Motor thermal protection current to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate See Mot therm current H page 78 ACC Acceleration 0 00 to 6 000 s 2 3 0s O Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq F 5 page 74 To have repeatability in ramps the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application See Acceleration A
183. ailure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage ADANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH If Output Phase Loss is set to No O Loss of cable is not detected Check that this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 51 28692 03 2010 15 Setup 16 1 28692 03 2010 Overview Overview What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Factory configuration 18 Application functions 19 Basic functions 23 Graphic display terminal option 24 Graphic display terminal option 24 Powering up the drive for the first time 27 Remote display terminal option 30 Structure of the parameter tables 31 Finding a parameter in this document 32 Description of the HMI 33 Structure of the menus 34 51 28692 03 2010 17 Overview Factory configuration Factory settings The Altivar 32 is factory set for common operating conditions Display drive ready Ready when motor is ready to run and motor frequency when motor is running The LIS to LI6 logic inputs AI2 and analog inputs LO1 logic output AO1 analog output and R2 relay are unassigned Stop mode when fault detected freewheel
184. al which works with FLASH V1 11E26 or higher it is possible to display more detailed information than can be shown on the integrated display terminal 1 Graphic display 2 Function keys F1 F2 F3 F4 see page 142 7 ESC key Aborts a value a parameter or a menu to return to the previous selection 3 STOP RESET key 4 RUN key 6 Key for reversing the direction of rotation of the motor 5 Jog dial Press ENT To save the current value To enter the selected menu or parameter Turn To increment or decrement a value To go to the next or previous line To increase or decrease the reference if control via the graphic display terminal is activated Note Keys 3 4 5 and 6 can be used to control the drive directly if control via the graphic display terminal is activated To activate the keys on the remote display terminal you first have to configure Ref 1 channel HMI L For more information see page 139 1 28692 03 2010 Overview Example configuration windows Single selection LANGUAGE T rk e Multiple selection PARAMETER SELECTION SETTINGS Ramp increment Example configuration window for one value RDY Term 0 0Hz 00 Acceleration When powering up the graphic display terminal for the first time the user has to select the required language When only one selection is possible the selectio
185. alarm H A Low torque alarm Dynamic load alarm d L d A Freq meter Alarm F 9L A 51 28692 03 2010 57 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Name Description Unit 5 OTHER STATE List of secondary states This menu is visible only on graphic display terminal FL motor fluxing FL PECL PTC Alarm PECL F SE Fast stop in prog SE Current Th attained Freq Th attained F E A Freq Th 2 attained 5 A Frequency ref att 5 E SA Motor th state att 5 External fault alarm E E F H LI E Auto restart A UE DO FEL Remote FEL E Un Auto tuning U n USA Undervoltage U 5 C nF I Config 1act LnF 1 LE nF Config 2 L nF 2 A HSP attained L A D virage charge A n A 1 Set 1 active EF P I Set 2 active CL F P2 C F P J Set 3 active L F P 3 br 5 In braking br 5 dbL DC bus loading d b L EEHR High torque alarm E E HA Low torque alarm NF c d Forward d fir r 5 Reverse Nr r 5 F 8L A Freq metre Alarm F 9L bE DIAGNOSTICS This menu is visible only on graphic display terminal REHE FAULT HISTORY Shows the 8 last detected faults alle d Past fault 1 Fault record 1 1 is last
186. an only be accessed if 3 1 ACCESS LEVEL L AL is set to Expert E P mode Drive reinitialization Can be used to reset all detected faults without having to disconnect the drive from the power supply No O Function inactive Yes 5 Reinitialization Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s The parameter changes back to No automatically as soon as the operation is complete The drive can only be reinitialized when locked 51 28692 03 2010 233 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FAULT MANAGEMENT continued FETTE AUTOMATIC RESTART HEr Automatic restart No n 0 DANGER The automatic restart can only be used machines or installations which do not pose any danger to either personnel or equipment If the automatic restart is activated R1 will only indicate a fault has been detected once the time out period for the restart sequence has expired The equipment must be used in compliance with national and regional safety regulations Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury The drive fault relay remains activated if this function is active The speed reference and the operating direction must be maintained Use 2 wire control 2 3 wire control is set to 2 wire 2 and 2 wire type is se
187. ancel correction at very low Q speed if this would hamper rotation of the motor Correction max spd Correction min spd 0 1 Hz 1 0 1 at599 Hz This parameter be accessed if Load sharing L b is set to Yes 5 Speed threshold in Hz above which maximum load correction is applied LbL3 Torque offset 0 to 300 0 This parameter be accessed if Load sharing L b set to Yes YE 5 Minimum torque for load correction as a of the rated torque Below this threshold no corrections are made Used to avoid torque instabilities when the torque direction is not constant LEF Sharing filter 0to 20s 100 ms This parameter can be accessed if Load sharing L b is set to Yes YE 5 Time constant filter for correction in ms Used in the event of flexible mechanical coupling in order to avoid instabilities Q These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 51 28692 03 2010 111 Configuration Mode ConF Inputs outputs CFG The parameters in the INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG menu can only be modified when
188. anual and on the drive nameplate 3 These settings are independent of the AUTO DC INJECTION A d E function These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 160 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF AUTO DC INJECTION Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting S APPLICATION FUNCT continued Il E AUTO DC INJECTION Auto DC injection Yes 5 ADANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH When Auto DC injection dL is set to Continuous the injection of current is done even if a run command has not been sent Check this action will not endanger personnel or equipment Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury i A WARNING NO HOLDING TORQUE DC injection braking does not provide any holding torque at zero speed DC injection braking does not work when there is a loss of power or when the drive detects a fault Where necessary use a separate brake to maintain torque levels Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury
189. arameter can also be accessed in the SETTINGS 5 menu 2 Because in this case the detected fault does not trigger a stop it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output to its indication These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped EH 1 2s the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2 s 51 28692 03 2010 239 Configuration Mode ConF Deferred stop on thermal alarm This function helps to prevent the drive stopping between two steps of the process if the drive or motor overheats by authorizing operation until the next stop At the next stop the drive is locked until the thermal state falls back to a value which undershoots the set threshold by 2096 Example A trip threshold set at 8096 enables reactivation at 6096 One thermal state threshold must be defined for the drive and one thermal state threshold for the motor s which will trip the deferred stop Code 5H E E Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FAULT MANAGEMENT continued THERMAL ALARM STOP 5HE Thermal alarm stop No n 0
190. ard mot freq b F is set to 60 Hz This parameter is not visible if Motor control type page 92 is set to Sync mot 5 See Rated motor freq F 5 page 94 fay e fe Rated motor speed 0 to 65 535 rpm According to drive rating Rated motor speed given on the nameplate This parameter is not visible if Motor control type page 82 is to Sync mot 5 See Rated motor speed n 5 page 94 0 to 9 999 rpm then 10 00 to 60 00 krpm on the integrated display terminal If rather than the rated speed the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a 96 calculate the rated speed as follows 100 slip as a Nominal speed Synchronous speed x 100 or F 50 slip in Hz Nominal speed Synchronous speed x a 50 Hz motors or Nominal speed Synchronous speed x aoe 60 Hz motors 74 S1A28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Max frequency 10 to 599 Hz 60 Hz The factory setting is 60 Hz or preset to 72 Hz if Standard mot freq 5 F is set to 60 Hz The maximum value is limited by the following conditions It must not exceed 10 times the value of Rated motor freq F 5 See Max frequency r page 92 EUn Auto tuning No action 5 0 For asynchronous motors see page 95 For synchronous motors see p
191. ary format version of the drive Catalog version 0 to 65 535 Catalog version of the drive e ln FUNCTION BLOCKS continued Command Allows to start and stop the function blocks manually FB Command F b is forced to Stop 5 E if there is no valid function blocks application in the drive memory FB Command b d set to Start 5 E when the function blocks application switch to Run according to FB start mode F configuration Note As soon as the function blocks are started the drive is considered as in running state and the modification of configuration parameters is no longer possible 5 amp Stop 5 Function blocks application Stop command 5E r E Start 5 E Function blocks application Start command 51 28692 03 2010 143 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting start mode No n 0 MEE DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Start mode value will allow the start of the program by the selected channel Check that this configuration will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Allows to choose the different ways of starting the Function blocks application Note Modifications of this parameter are not taken into account if the Function blocks app
192. ased on DC bus measurement motor running or stopped EHr Motor thermal state Motor thermal state 100 Nominal thermal state 118 OLF threshold motor overload EHd Drv thermal state 96 Drive thermal state 100 Nominal thermal state 118 OHF threshold drive overload nno MONIT MOTOR 5Pd Motor speed rpm Motor speed in rpm UOP Motor voltage V Motor voltage Motor power Output power monitoring 100 nominal motor power Motor torque 96 Output torque value 100 nominal motor torque Lig Motor current A Estimated motor current 44 1 28692 03 2010 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Name Description Unit 1 2 MONITORING continued MAP LOGIC INPUT Logic input functions EL Mel assignment Read only parameters cannot be configured It displays all the functions that are assigned to the logic input in order to check for multiple assignments If no functions have been assigned No O is displayed Use the jog dial to scroll through the functions The use of graphic display terminal allows to see the delay LI1 On Delay 1 2 Possible values are the same than in configuration menu page 114 EET L assignment to All the logic inputs available on the drive are processed as in the example for LI1 above LBA KATIA 19 16118 L I5 State of logic inputs LI1 to LI6 Can be used to visualize the
193. at 0 the speed reaches 0 Hz the drive stops and must be reset by a new run command If low speed Low speed L 5 is not 0 the traverse control function continues to operate above Low speed L 5 Motor speed Base reference dip With LSP 0 c 0 t tbO Motor speed Base reference 5 With LSP gt 0 LSP tbO 51428692 03 2010 223 Configuration Mode ConF FEF Init traverse ctrl Reinitialize traverse control This command be assigned to a logic input or to a communication bus control word bit It resets the E b O alarm and the E b operating time to 0 and reinitializes the reference to the base reference As long as remains at 1 the traverse control function is disabled and the speed remains the same as the base reference This command is used primarily when changing reels Motor speed Base 4 reference dtF 1 1 1 1 1 tbO 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 t Bit150f 4 LRS1 0 t EbO 4 52 uu dE 1 1 0 t rtr 4 224 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Counter wobble Master drive Slave drive
194. be modified with the drive running or stopped Code fe TE Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FULL continued MOTOR CONTROL bFr 50 Standard mot freq 50 Hz IEC 50 This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters High speed H 5 page 75 Freq threshold d page 89 Rated motor volt U n 5 Rated motor freq 5 and Max frequency F 50 Hz IEC 5 0 IEC 60 Hz NEMA 50 NEMA EFr Max frequency 10 to 599 Hz 60 Hz The factory setting is 60 Hz or preset to 72 Hz if Standard mot freq 5 F is set to 60 Hz The maximum value is limited by the following conditions It must not exceed 10 times the value of Rated motor freq F 5 Std Motor control type Standard 5 d Note Select law before entering parameter values SVC V U U E Sensorless vector control with internal speed loop based on voltage feedback calculation For applications needing high performance during starting or operation Standard 5 9 2 points Volts Hz without internal speed loop For simple applications that do not require high performance Simple motor control law keeping a constant Voltage Frequency ratio with a possible adjustment of the curve bottom This law is generally used for motors connected in parallel Some specific applications with motors in paral
195. bient temperature Wait for the drive to cool down before restarting Proc overload flt Process overload Check and remove the cause of the overload Check the parameters of the PROCESS OVERLOAD HL d function page 253 Motor overload Triggered by excessive motor Check the setting of the motor thermal protection check the current motor load Wait for the motor to cool down before restarting mgl 1 output phase loss Loss of one phase at drive output Check the connections from the drive to the motor 51 28692 03 2010 293 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Detected Fault Name Probable cause Remedy motor phase loss Motor not connected or motor power Check the connections from the drive to the motor too low If an output contactor is being used set Output contactor open Output Phase Loss to Output cut page Instantaneous instability inthe motor 238 current Test on a low power motor or without a motor In factory settings mode motor phase loss detection is active Output Phase Loss Yes 5 To check the drive in a test or maintenance environment without having to use a motor with the same rating as the drive in particular for high power drives deactivate motor phase loss detection Output Phase Loss No DJ see instruc
196. bient temperature will be limited to 40 C Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage 5E d Standard 5 d The fan starts and stops automatically according to the drive thermal state Un Always The fan is started Never 5 E P The fan is stopped 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual or on the drive nameplate 2 If a graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9 999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit example 15 65 for 15 650 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped i 2s the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2 s 51 28692 03 2010 91 Configuration Mode ConF Motor control The parameters the MOTOR CONTROL dH menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present with the following exceptions e Auto tuning page 100 which may cause the motor to start up Parameters containing the sign in the code column which can
197. ble if Ramp type P E is set to Customized U 5 See Begin Dec round 3 page 156 ARE End Dec round 0 to 100 1096 Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a of the Deceleration 9 or Deceleration 2 d E 2 ramp time be set between 0 and 100 Begin Dec round 3 Q Visible if Ramp type is set to Customized 1 5 See End Dec round A page 156 LSP Low speed 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz Q Motor frequency at minimum reference can be set between 0 and High speed H 5 P page 75 See Low speed L 5 page 75 HSF High speed 0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz Q Motor frequency at maximum reference be set between Low speed L 5 P and Max frequency r The factory setting changes to 60 Hz if Standard mot freq 5 F r is set to 60Hz NEMA 5 0 See High speed H 5 page 75 51 28692 03 2010 77 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting HSPe speed 2 0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz Visible if 2 High speed 5 is not set to No n See High speed 2 H 5 P 2 page 229 H5P3 High speed 3 0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz Visible if 4 High speed 5 is not set to No n O See High speed 3 H 5 P 3 page 229 HSPY High speed 4 0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz Visible if 4 High speed 5 is not set to No n
198. c 5 55 2 cs lt 5 D D oc c gt 5 o 69 8 5 e 5 x o 2 a c c 3 3 a x g g gt 5 5 2 F 1 28692 03 2010 Brake engage time b Ir Brake release freq br E Brake Release time Ib r Brake release FW bE n Brake engage freq e Jo Jump at reversal BEE Brake engage delay EE r Time to restart Key 178 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting APPLICATION FUNCT continued bu BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 148 Brake assignment No n 0 Logic output or control relay Note If the brake is assigned only a ramp stop is possible Check the Type of stop 5 E page 158 Brake logic control can only be assigned if Motor control type is not set to Standard 5 d VIF 5pts UF 5 Quad U F 9 or Sync mot 5 See Compatibility table page 150 to see the compatible functions n E No O Function not assigned in this case none of the function parameters can be accessed R2 2 Relay LU LO1 1 Logic output dO 1 901 dH 1 Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if
199. can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 1 For additional information refer to NEMA ICS 1 1 latest edition Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control and to NEMA ICS 7 1 latest edition Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection Installation and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems 51 28692 03 2010 9 About the Book A CAUTION INCOMPATIBLE LINE VOLTAGE Before turning on and configuring the drive ensure that the line voltage is compatible with the supply voltage range shown on the drive nameplate The drive may be damaged if the line voltage is not compatible Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage CAUTION RISK OF DERATED PERFORMANCE DUE TO CAPACITOR AGING The product capacitor performances after a long time storage above 2 years can be degraded In that case before using the product apply the following procedure Use a variable AC supply connected between L1 and L2 even for ATV32eeeNA4 references ncrease AC supply voltage to have 25 of rated voltage during 30 min 5096 of rated voltage during 30 min 75 of rated voltage during 30 min 100 of rated voltage during 30 min Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage User comments The word drive as used in this manual refers to the controller portion of the a
200. certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 148 H5U High speed hoisting No n 0 n E No O Function inactive 550 Speed ref 5 5 0 Speed reference mode C 5 E I Limit 50 Current limitation mode OF Motor speed coeff 0 to 100 10096 Speed reduction coefficient calculated by the drive for Ascending direction This parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting H 5 5 is set to Speed ref 5 5 D Cor Gen speed coeff 0 to 100 50 Speed reduction coefficient calculated by the drive for Descending direction This parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting H 5 D is not set to No 5 0 EDS Load measuring tm 0 1 s to 65 0 5 Duration of speed step for measurement This parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting H 5 5 is not set to No D 5 Measurement spd 0 to Rated motor freq F 5 40 Hz Speed stabilized for measurement This parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting H 5 5 is not set to No 5 0 CLO High speed Limit 0 to 1 5 In 1 In 1 Current limitation at high speed This parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting H 5 D is set to I Limit 5 2 Q Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss L fault mode if this has been enabled see page 238 SE E I Limit frequency
201. ched on again as there is no memory to record the motor thermal state When supplying more than one motor When supplying motors with ratings less than 0 2 times the nominal drive current When using motor switching Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage 236 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting ELE FAULT MANAGEMENT continued MOTOR THERMAL PROT EHE Motor protect type Self cooled AL L Note A trip will occur when the thermal state reaches 118 of the rated state and reactivation will occur when the state falls back below 100 n E No 0 No protection HE L Self cooled A L For self cooled motors Force cool For force cooled motors f Motor therm level 0 to 118 100 Trip threshold for motor thermal alarm logic output or relay 1 2 therm level 0 to 118 100 Trip threshold for motor 2 thermal alarm logic output or relay EEd3 Motor3 therm level 0 to 118 100 Trip threshold for motor 3 thermal alarm logic output or relay OLL Overload fault mgt Freewheel 5 RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR If Overload fault mgt Z L L is set to Ignore O motor thermal protection is no longuer provided by the drive Provide an alternative means of ther
202. components When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements the relevant instructions must be followed Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may result in injury harm or improper operating results Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage 2010 Schneider Electric All rights reserved 1 28692 03 2010 Table of Contents Table of Contents Safety Informati n aci dee ee 7 About the Book uestre ao ERN RACER ee 8 General Overview iii ie ios cies ewe ey rada ed See sys We he Se GENERAR E E M Ea x a iA 11 Chapter 1 DOCU Pie ie UT 13 Steps for setting up the drive 2 4 14 Preliminary recommendations 15 Chapter 2 ule CE 17 COFIIQUESLTOT 45 754 athe iuo vac diee te wate waa cris a arin 18 Application f nctions s ure rr pe fang RR Rm a hm rmn De mn ncm pn ER DR RR 19 Basic functions REA ER RR URN E ERR 23 Graphic display terminal option 24 Powering the drive for the first 27 Remote display terminal option 30 Str
203. configuration is edited only the non protected parameters will be accessible HL r I Notallowed UL 1 Means that SoMove or the graphic display terminal cannot save the configuration fal ih rr Download rights dL r O Locked d L 0 Locked drive means that the configuration can be downloaded only in a locked drive which configuration has the same password If the passwords are different download is not permitted dL l Unlock dL 1 Unlocked drive means that the configuration can be downloaded only in a drive without active password dL Not allowed d L 2 Not allowed the configuration cannot be downloaded dL r 3 Lock unlock d L 3 Lock Not download is permitted following case 0 or case 1 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 51 28692 03 2010 63 Monitoring Mode MOn 64 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Configuration Mode ConF What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Introduction 66 Organization tree 67 My Menu 68 Factory Settings 69
204. contactor ass No 5 0 Logic output or control relay n E No B Function not assigned in this case of the function parameters can be accessed I LO1 1 Logical output LO1 R2 c 2 Relay r2 dO I dO1 d 7 1 Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO 1 assignment page 129 is set to No 5 D re dE lal Output contact fdbk No 5 0 The motor starts up when the assigned input or bit changes to 0 n E 5 O Function inactive L I I LH 1 Logical input LI1 C See the assignment conditions on page 138 fal Delay to motor run 0 05 to 60 s 0 15 Time delay for Motor control following the sending of a run command Output contactor state monitoring if the feedback is assigned If the contactor fails to close at the end of the set time the drive Q will lock in FCF2 mode This parameter be accessed if Out contactor ass is assigned or if Output contact fdbk A is assigned The time delay must be greater than the closing time of the output contactor dH5 Delay to open cont 0 to 5 00 s 0 10 s Time delay for output contactor opening command following motor stop This parameter can be accessed if Output contact is assigned The time delay must be greater than the opening time of the output contactor If it is set to 0 the detected fault will not be monitored If the c
205. ctions and commands assigned to CDxx switchable internal bits are inactive Note to 13 can only be used for switching between 2 networks They do not have equivalent logic inputs 136 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Terminals Integrated Modbus Integrated CANopen Communication card Internal bit can be switched CD00 LI2 1 C101 1 C201 1 C301 1 CD01 LI3 C102 C202 C302 CD02 14 103 203 C303 CD03 LI5 C104 C204 C304 CD04 LI6 C105 C205 C305 CD05 C106 C206 C306 CD06 C107 C207 C307 CD07 C108 C208 C308 CD08 C109 C209 C309 CD09 C110 C210 C310 CD10 C111 C211 C311 CD11 C112 C212 C312 CD12 LAI C113 C213 C313 CD13 LAI2 C114 C214 C314 CD14 C115 C215 C315 CD15 0101 to OL10 1 If 2 3 wire control page 73 is set to 3 wire 3 L 12 E I Land 30 cannot be accessed 51 28692 03 2010 137 Configuration Mode ConF Assignment conditions for logic inputs and control bits The following elements are available for every command or function that can be assigned to a logic input or a control bit L1 L to 46 L B Drive with or without option LAM L A I to LAI2 L 12 Logical inputs C101 C110 C With integrated Modbus in I O profile O configuration C111 E
206. cture A parameter can contain some pictograms Each pictogram has its legend at the end of the table Main mictograms These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped EE 1 2s To change the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2 s 51 28692 03 2010 31 32 Overview Finding a parameter in this document The following assistance with finding explanations on a parameter is provided With the integrated display terminal and the remote display terminal Direct use of the parameter code index page 301 to find the page giving details of the displayed parameter With the graphic display terminal Select the required parameter and press F1 Code The parameter code is displayed instead of its name while the key is held down Example ACC SETTINGS Ramp increment Acceleration SETTINGS Code increment d Le Deceleration Low speed High speed Deceleration Low speed High speed H 50 0 Hz Code lt lt gt gt Quick Code lt lt gt gt Then use the parameter code index page 301 to find the page giving details of the displayed parameter
207. d EEH High torque thd 300 to 300 100 High torque frequency threshold fe E il Low torque thd 300 to 300 50 Low torque frequency threshold 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 2 170 Pulse warning thd 0 to 20 000 Hz 0Hz Frequency level Visible if Frequency meter F is not No n FAULT MANAGEMENT continued I pc CATCH ON THE FLY Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 147 IP iL re Catch on the fly No n 1 Used to enable a smooth restart if the run command is maintained after the following events Loss of line supply or disconnection Clearance of current detected fault or automatic restart Freewheel stop The speed given by the drive resumes from the estimated speed of the motor at the time of the restart then follows the ramp to the reference speed This function requires 2 wire level control When the function is operational it activates at each run command resulting in a slight delay of the current 0 5 s max Catch on the fly L is forced to No n O if brake logic control Brake assignment 4 L is assigned page 179 or if Auto DC injection A dC is set to Continuous E page 161 n E No 2 Function inactive HES Yes 5 Function active 1 In corr
208. d Q It can be accessed if Type of stop 5 E E is set to Fast stop 5 E or Ramp stop and if Brake assignment or Auto DC injection are configured See page 158 51 28692 03 2010 89 Configuration Mode ConF Q Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Motor therm level 0 to 11896 10096 Q Trip threshold for motor thermal alarm logic output or relay See page 237 JPF Skip Frequency 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz Skip frequency This parameter helps to prevent prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency Q This function can be used to help to prevent a speed which would cause resonance being reached Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive See page 168 INE te Skip Frequency 2 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz 2nd skip frequency This parameter helps to prevent prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency This function can be used to help to prevent a speed which would cause resonance being reached Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive See page 168 3rd Skip Frequency 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz 3rd skip frequency This parameter helps to prevent prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency This function can be used to help to prevent speed which would cause resonance being reached Setting the function to 0 render
209. d INFE INPUTS ASSIGNMENTS ILO I Logic input 1 assignment No 1 Possible assignment for the Function block logic input n E No a O Not assigned F LE No drive flt F L Drive fault detection status relay normally energized and de energized if there is a trip F E A Freq Th attain Frequency threshold attained Freq threshold 4 page 89 2A Freq Th 2 attain 2 Frequency threshold 2 attained Freq threshold 2 2 d page 89 Fr Ref 1 channel F Reference source 1 Ref 2 channel 2 Reference source 2 I ch1 active E d Command channel channel 1 for CSS d 2 ch2 active d 2 Command channel channel 2 for CSS Fr Ib Ref 1B channel Ib Reference channel channel 1b for RFC 5 Yes 5 Yes L L LH _ 1 Logical input 1 See the assignment conditions on page 138 Logic input x assignment No n 0 All the Function Blocks logic inputs available on the drive are processed as in the example for Logic input 1 assignment L O 1 above up to Logic input 10 assignment L 144 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Adjustment range Factory setting Code Name Description IAO I Analog input 1 assignment No n 1 Possible assignment for the Function block analog input n E No a D
210. d if Load sharing L b set to Yes YE 5 Torque 4 LbC Nominal torque 12 4 1 1 1 1 Frequency Nominal torque 4 cm These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 51 28692 03 2010 109 Configuration Mode ConF Load sharing parameters that can be accessed at expert level Principle Torque reference Reference i Speed Ramp Speed loop Balancing K LBC LBF LBC1 LBC2 LBC3 The load sharing factor K is determined by the torque and speed with two factors K1 and K2 K K1 x K2 K1 Speed LBC1 LBC2 K2 4 gt Torque Rated torque x 1 LBC3 LBC 110 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting L amp C Correction min spd 0 to 598 9 Hz 0 Hz This parameter can be accessed if Load sharing L b is set to Yes 5 Minimum speed for load correction in Hz Below this threshold no corrections are made Used to c
211. dedicated Safety manual 5 5 STO status Status of the Safe Torque Off safety function ld L E Idle dL E STO not progress 5r Safe stop 5 E O STO in progress FL E Fault F L E STO fault detected 5155 5158 status Status of the Safe Limit speed safety function n O Not config O SLS not configured IdLE Idle HL E SLS notin progress Safe ramp 5 5 SLS ramp in progress 51 5 Speed limited 51 5 SLS speed limitation in progress 5rg Safe stop 5 O SLS safe torque off request in progress FL E Fault SLS fault detected 55 15 1881 status Status of the Safe Stop 1 safety function n Not config 2 551 not configured IdL E Idle dL E 551 not in progress 55 l Safe ramp 5 5 551 ramp in progress 5 E D Safe stop 5 551 safe torque off request in progress F L E Fault F L E 551 fault detected 48 1 28692 03 2010 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Name Description Unit SFREE Im Safety fault reg Safety function detected fault error register Bit 0 1 Logical Input debounce time out Bit 1 Reserved Bit 2 1 Motor speed sign changed during SS1 stop Bit 3 1 Motor speed reached SS1 trip area Bit 4 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 1 Motor speed sign changed during SLS Safe Limitation Bit 7 1 Motor speed reached SLS trip area Bit 8 Reserved
212. digit on the right indicates The same principle is used for all multiple selections 34 1 28692 03 2010 Programming What s in this Part This part contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page 3 Reference Mode rEF 37 4 Monitoring Mode MOn 41 5 Configuration Mode ConF 65 6 Interface ItF 261 7 Open Save as trA 217 8 Password COd 281 9 Multipoint Screen 283 51 28692 03 2010 35 36 1 28692 03 2010 Reference Mode rEF Reference Mode rEF What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Introduction 38 Organization tree 39 Menu 40 51 28692 03 2010 37 Reference Mode rEF Introduction Use the reference mode to monitor and if the reference channel is the analog input 1 Ref 1 channel 1 page 139 set to Al virtual 1 adjust the actual reference value by modifying the analog input voltage value If local control is enabled Ref 1 channel 1 page 139 set to HMI L C the jog dial on the remote display terminal or the Up Down Navigation keys on the remote display terminal acts as a potentiometer to change the reference value up and down within the limits preset by other parameters Low speed L 5 or High speed H 5 P There is no need to press the ENT key to confirm the change of the reference 38 1 28
213. djustable speed drive as defined by NEC 10 1 28692 03 2010 General Overview What s in this Part This part contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page 1 Setup 13 2 Overview 17 51 28692 03 2010 11 12 1 28692 03 2010 Setup Setup What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Steps for setting up the drive 14 Preliminary recommendations 15 S1A28692 03 2010 13 Setup Steps for setting up the drive INSTALLATION 1 Please refer to the installation manual PROGRAMMING 2 Apply input power to the drive but do not give a run command 3 Configure The nominal frequency of the motor Standard mot freq 5 F page 74 if this is not 50 Hz The motor parameters in the MOTOR CONTROL dr menu page 92 only if the factory configuration of the drive is not suitable The application functions in the INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG _ menu 112 the COMMAND menu 139 and the APPLICATION FUNCT F menu page 152 only if the factory configuration of the drive is not suitable Tips Before beginning programming complete the customer setting tables page 301 Use the Restore config 5 parameter page 69 to return to the factory settings at any time Tolocate the description of a function
214. down the ENT key for 2 s 5 2 5 E 2 Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming To change the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2 s 51 28692 03 2010 69 Configuration Mode ConF Macro Configuration Code Name Description Factory setting 1 3 CONFIGURATION continued CRG Macro configuration Start Stop 5 5 DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION 2 Check that the selected macro configuration is compatible with the wiring diagram used Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury o SE 5 Start Stop 5 5 Start stop H d E M handling 5 Handling HSE Hoisting H 5 E Hoisting GE n Gen Use L E n General use P d PID regul 14 PID regulation n E E Network C n Communication bus These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on
215. e b set to Yes 5 page 179 Brake release FW 5 is set to Rated mot current 6 page 179 Brake Release time 5 E is set to 0 5 s page 179 Brake release freq b is set to Auto O page 180 Brake engage freq 5 is set to Auto U E O page 180 Brake engage time b E is set to 0 5 s page 180 Engage at reversal 5 E d is set to No n page 180 Jump at reversal J d is set to Auto O page 181 Time to restart r is set to page 181 Current ramp time b r r is set to 0 s page 183 Low speed 1 5 P is set to Rated motor slip calculated by the drive page 75 Output Phase Loss P L is set to Yes 5 page 238 No further modifications can be made to this parameter Catch on the fly F L is set to No n O page 235 No further modifications can be made to this parameter Return to factory settings Returning to factory settings with Config Source F 5 is set to Macro Conf page 69 will return the drive to the selected macro configuration The Macro configuration F 5 parameter does not change although Customized macro 5 disappears Note The factory settings that appear in the parameter tables correspond to Macro configuration 5 Start Stop 5 5 This is the macro configuration set at the factory Example diagrams for use with the macro configuratio
216. e 138 r 51 28692 03 2010 221 Configuration Mode ConF TRAVERSE CONTROL Function for winding reels of yarn in textile applications Traverse control drive Winding drive Reel of yarn Main shaft i E 1 1 Winding motor E Traverse control motor Cam The speed of rotation of the cam must follow a precise profile to ensure that the reel is steady compact and linear Run command LI or traverse control bit Motorspeed Base reference ACC ran dEC ramp gt t End of function Start of function Bit 15 of word LRS1 traverse control active t The function starts when the drive has reached its base reference and the traverse control command has been enabled When the traverse control command is disabled the drive returns to its base reference following the ramp determined by the traverse control function The function then stops as soon as it has returned to this reference Bit 15 of word LRS1 is at 1 while the function is active 222 51 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Function parameters These define the cycle of frequency variations around the base reference as shown in the diagram below Motor sp
217. e 269 51 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Factory Settings Code Name Description Factory setting 1 3 CONFIGURATION Es FACTORY SETTINGS FCS Config Source Macro Conf In 1 Choice of source configuration If the configuration switching function is configured it will not be possible to access Config 1 C F 5 and Config 2 C F G2 Note To load the drive s presettings previously memorized Config 1 5 or Config 2 5 2 select the source configuration Config Source F 5 Config 1 C F 5 1 or Config 2 C F G 2 followed by a factory setting Goto FACTORY SETTINGS L F 5 YES 5 I Macro Conf 1 Factory configuration return to selected macro configuration CFG I Config 1 1 Configuration 1 Config 2 G 2 Configuration 2 Pr El PARAMETER GROUP LIST Selection of menus to be loaded See the multiple selection procedure on page 33 for the integrated display terminal and page 24 for the graphic display terminal Note In factory configuration and after a return to factory settings PARAMETER GROUP LIST will be empty ALL AII AL L All parameters the function blocks program will also be erased d r Drive configuration d N The 1 DRIVE MENU d menu without COMMUNICATION ON In the 2 4 DISPLAY CONFIG menu Return std name 5 5 P pag
218. e 271 returns to No D Motor param 7 5 Motor parameters see page 279 The following selections can only be accessed if Config Source F C 5 is set to Macro Conf In 1 menu The COMMUNICATION menu without either Scan In1 address n NA 1 to Scan In8 address E Scan Out1 address n C A to Scan Out8 address A B d 15 Display config d 5 The 3 3 MONITORING CONFIG menu GFS Goto FACTORY SETTINGS DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION 1 2s Check that the modification of the current configuration is compatible with the wiring diagram used Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury It is only possible to revert to the factory settings if at least one group of parameters has previously been selected n 5 0 No 5 Yes 5 The parameter changes back to No O automatically as soon as the operation is complete EE Save config No n 0 The active configuration to be saved does not appear for selection For example if it is Config 0 5 E 2 only Config 1 5 E r 1 and Config 2 5 2 appear The parameter changes back to No O as soon as the operation is complete n E 6 O No 5 Config 0 5 O Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s 5 I Config 1 5E 1 Press and hold
219. e functions have been grouped in submenus Like menus submenus are identified by a dash after their code When the drive is running the value displayed is one of the monitoring parameters By default the value displayed is the input frequency reference Frequency ref F H parameter page 44 While the value of the new monitoring parameter required is being displayed press a second time on the jog dial key to display the units or press and hold down the jog dial ENT again for 2 seconds to confirm the change of monitoring parameter and store it From then on it is the value of this parameter that will be displayed during operation even after powering down Unless the new choice is confirmed by pressing and holding down ENT again the display will revert to the previous parameter after powering down Note After the drive has been turned off or following a loss of line supply the parameter displayed is the drive status example Ready d The selected parameter is displayed following a run command 42 1 28692 03 2010 Monitoring Mode MOn Organization tree Displayed parameters ofthe diagram are given as examples 1 Visible only with graphic display terminal O Values o units a 1 2 m Tr oeo rm i LaF gt C1 es e Bs
220. e time 0 to 5 00 s 0s Brake engage time brake response time See page 180 Jump at reversal Auto A UE D Auto A UE 0 0 to 10 Hz See page 181 A UE O Auto A L E O Nominal value Time to restart 0 00 to 15 00 s 0 00 s Time between the end of a brake engage sequence and the start of a brake release sequence See page 181 88 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting EL If Motoring torque lim 0 to 300 100 Torque limitation in motor mode as a or in 0 1 increments of the rated torque in accordance with the Torque increment parameter page 202 See page 202 EL IG torque lim 0 to 30076 100 Torque limitation in generator mode as a or in 0 1 increments of the rated torque in accordance with the Torque increment n parameter page 202 See page 202 Traverse freq high 0 to 10 Hz 4 Hz Traverse high See page 227 Traverse freq low 0 to 10 Hz 4Hz Traverse low See page 227 SERI Quick step High 0 to Traverse freq high E H 0 Hz Quick step high See page 227 Q S SL Quick step Low 0 to Traverse freq low E L 0 Hz Quick step low See page 227 Q IE T5 fal Current threshold 0 to 1 5 In 1 In 1 Q Cur
221. ed time The oscillation frequency depends on the system kinematics Parameter Rise time Overshoot Stabilization time Static error NN rPG x x NN x 51428692 03 2010 195 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FUn APPLICATION FUNCT continued els PID REGULATOR Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 148 feedback No n 0 0 No B Not assigned I 1 AH 1 Analog input A1 12 AI2 12 Analog input A2 13 AI3 3 Analog input P 1 RP P 1 Pulse input A IL I virtual 1 L 1 Virtual analog input 1 by the communication bus A Al virtual 2 2 Virtual analog input 2 by the communication bus I OAO1 BRE 1 Function blocks Analog Output 01 HH OA10 OA 10 Function blocks Analog Output 10 lal AME Al2 net channel No 0 This parameter can be accessed if PID feedback ass F is set to Al virtual 2 This parameter can also be accessed the INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 0 menu n E No B Not assigned Modbus d b Integrated Modbus Hn CANopen A n Integrated CANo
222. eed tdn tUP Frequency jump 4 qSH i trH Base reference trL i Frequency jump 0 gt Ec Yarn control Assignment of the traverse control command to a logic input or to a communication bus control word bit Traverse freq high H in Hertz Ert Traverse Freq Low L in Hertz Quick step High 5 5 in Hertz quet Quick step Low 951 in Hertz EUF Traverse ctrl accel U P time in seconds Edn Traverse ctrl decel d time in seconds Reel parameters beg Reel time b O Time taken to make a reel in minutes This parameter is intended to signal the end of winding When the traverse control operating time since command Yarn control reaches the value of Reel time b D the logic output or one of the relays changes to state 1 if the corresponding function End reel b O has been assigned The traverse control operating time 5 can be monitored online by a communication bus Decrease ref speed d Decrease the base reference In certain cases the base reference has to be reduced as the reel increases in size The Decrease ref speed d value corresponds to time Reel time 4 O Once this time has elapsed the reference continues to fall following the same ramp If low speed Low speed L 5 P is
223. emperature returns to normal Sls ir Switching freq 2 to 16 kHz 4 kHz HF CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE ATV32eeee 2 ratings if the RFI filters are disconnected operation on an IT system the drive s switching frequency must not exceed 4 kHz Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Switching frequency setting Adjustment range The maximum value is limited to 4 kHz if Motor surge limit 5 U L parameter page 107 is configured Note In the event of excessive temperature rise the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and reset it once the temperature returns to normal In case of high speed motor it is advised to increase the pwm frequency Switching freq 5 r at 8 12 or 16 kHz 106 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting nr d n TES Noise reduction No 0 Random frequency modulation helps to prevent any resonance which may occur at a fixed frequency No D Fixed frequency Yes 8 E 5 Frequency with random modulation nl dHnH SERE Boost activation Dynamic d n A Inactive No boost Dynamic d n A Dynamic boost Static 5 E Static boost 600 Boost 100 to 100 0 This parameter can be accessed if Boost activati
224. en selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 51 28692 03 2010 267 Interface ItF Communication map configuration Code Isl Name Description COM MAP CONFIG Factory setting Q Word 1 add select Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the lt lt and gt gt F2 and F3 keys and rotating the 0 jog dial 5 0 Format word 1 Format of word 1 Hex Signed 5 0 Unsigned 5 5 5 Hex el ta Word 2 add select Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the lt lt and gt gt F2 and F3 keys and rotating the 0 jog dial eric Q HE s d n5bL Format word 2 Format of word 2 Hex Signed 5 L Unsigned 5 5 5 Hex 1893 Word 3 add select Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the lt lt and gt gt F2 and F3 keys and rotating the 0 jog dial Q HIE 5 IL n5bL Format word 3 Format of word 3 Hex Signed 5 0 Unsigned n 5 5 Hex
225. ent 1 Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time 158 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting eL Jj DC injection assign No 0 A WARNING NO HOLDING TORQUE DC injection braking does not provide any holding torque at zero speed DC injection braking does not work when there is a loss of power or when the drive detects a fault Where necessary use a separate brake to maintain torque levels Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage DC injection braking is initiated when the assigned input or bit changes to state 1 If the input returns to state 0 and the run command is still active the motor will only restart if 2 3 wire control page 73 is set to 2 wire 2 and if 2 wire type is set to Level L L or Fwd priority P F 2 If not a new run command must be sent Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 148 n E No B Not assigned L L LI 11 Logical input LI1 0 See the assignment conditions on page 138 IdL DC inject level 1 0 1 to 1 41 In 2 0 64 In 2 A WARNING NO HOLDING TORQUE DC injection braking does not provide any holding torque at zero speed DC injection braking does not work when there is
226. equency 411 Distance A B A Slowdown limit switch reached B Automatic stop at a distance Stop distance 5 E d Frequency 4 m g Deceleration type 2 5 F Optimized Slowdown frequency quee Y Distance A B Note Ifthe deceleration ramp is modified while stopping at a distance is in progress this distance will not be observed fthe direction is modified while stopping at a distance is in progress this distance will not be observed A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL e Check that the parameters configured are consistent in particular you should check that the required distance is possible This function does not replace the stop limit switch which remains necessary for safety reasons Failure to follow these instructions will result in death serious injury or equipment damage 51 28692 03 2010 211 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting APPLICATION FUNCT continued CERTS POSITIONING BY SENSORS Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 148 SAE Stop FW limit sw No n 0 Stop switch forward n E No B Not assigned L I I LH 1 Logical input LI1 C See the assignment conditions on page 138 SAr Stop RV limit sw No 0 Stop switch reverse Ident
227. erbraking Set the integral gain PID integral gain 5 to minimum e Leave the derivative gain PID derivative gain d 5 at 0 Observe the PID feedback and the reference Switch the drive ON OFF a number of times or vary the load or reference rapidly a number of times Setthe proportional gain PID prop gain P 5 in order to ascertain the compromise between response time and stability in transient phases slight overshoot and 1 to 2 oscillations before stabilizing fthe reference varies from the preset value in steady state gradually increase the integral gain PID integral gain 7 5 reduce the proportional PID prop P 5 event of instability pump applications find a compromise between response time and static precision see diagram Lastly the derivative gain may permit the overshoot to be reduced and the response time to be improved although this will be more difficult to obtain a compromise in terms of stability as it depends on 3 gains Perform in production tests over the whole reference range 194 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Stabilization time 1 Regulated value rPG high Overshoot Static error Proportional gain rPG low Rise time time 4 Reference DIAM Integral gain time Reference 4 and correct rdG increas
228. eset speed 7 See Preset speed 7 5 P 7 page 166 15 1208 Preset speed 8 0 to 599 Hz 40 Hz Preset speed 8 See Preset speed 8 5 P E page 167 SE Preset speed 9 0 to 599 Hz 45 Hz Preset speed 9 See Preset speed 9 5 P 9 page 167 Preset speed 10 0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz Preset speed 10 See Preset speed 10 5 P page 167 Preset speed 11 0 to 599 Hz 55Hz Preset speed 11 See Preset speed 11 5 P page 167 SP 2 Preset speed 12 0 to 599 Hz 60 Hz Preset speed 12 See Preset speed 12 5 P 2 page 167 84 S1A28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting SP 13 Preset speed 13 0 to 599 Hz 70 Hz Preset speed 13 See Preset speed 13 5 P 3 page 167 5P Preset speed 14 0 to 599 Hz 80 Hz Preset speed 14 See Preset speed 14 5 P 4 page 167 5P 5 Preset speed 15 0 to 599 Hz 90 Hz Preset speed 15 See Preset speed 15 5 P 5 page 167 SP 16 Preset speed 16 0 to 599 Hz 100 Hz Preset speed 16 See Preset speed 16 5 P E page 167 Multiplying coeff 0 to 10096 10096 Multiplying coefficient can be accessed if Multiplier ref 2 3 page 154 has been assigned to the graphic display terminal See page 40 5r R Speed limitation 0 to 5096 1096 Limitation of speed variation See page 172
229. esponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that be modified during operation or when stopped 2s To change the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2 s WEE 51 28692 03 2010 235 Configuration Mode ConF Motor thermal protection Function Thermal protection by calculating the Note The motor thermal state is not saved when the drive is switched off Self cooled motors The tripping curves depend on the motor frequency Force cooled motors Only the 50 Hz tripping curve needs to be considered regardless of the motor frequency The following curves represent the trip time in seconds Trip time in seconds t aHz3Hz 5Hz 10H 20H 50H 10 000 Z 1 000 100 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 Motor current CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR External protection against overloads is required under the following circumstances When the product is being swit
230. f the application Q This parameter can be accessed if speed U is assigned 1 Deceleration 2 0 00 to 6 000 s 2 5 00 s Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq F 5 to 0 To have repeatability in ramps the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application Q This parameter can be accessed if speed U is assigned 1 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the SETTINGS 5 menu 2 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6 000 s according to Ramp increment r page 155 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 172 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF REFERENCE MEMORIZING Saving a speed reference value using a logic input command lasting longer than O 1 s This function is used to control the speed of several drives alternately via a single analog reference and one logic input for each drive e also used to confirm a line reference communication bus or network on several drives a logic input This allows movements to be synchronized by getting rid of variations when
231. figuration Contact Schneider Electric Product Support 51 28692 03 2010 291 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Detected Fault Name Probable cause Remedy SCF 1 Motor short Short circuit or grounding at the drive Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor and the circuit output motor insulation Reduce the switching frequency Connect chokes in series with the motor Check the adjustment of speed loop and brake Increase the Time to restart page 88 Increase the switching frequency SEIS sl Ground short Significant earth leakage current at the Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor and the circuit drive output if several motors are motor insulation connected in parallel Reduce the switching frequency Connect chokes in series with the motor Check the adjustment of speed loop and brake Increase the Time to restart page 88 Reduce the switching frequency SOF Overspeed Instability or driving load too high Check the motor gain and stability parameters Add a braking resistor Check the size of the motor drive load Check the parameters settings for the FREQUENCY METER function page 247 itis configured EM Speed fdback Signal on Pulse input missing if the Check the wiring of the input cable and the detector used loss input is used for speed measurement I mie Auto
232. function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 148 SAHE Summing ref 2 No 0 Selection of a reference to be added to Ref 1 channel F or Ref 1B channel F Ib n E No 0 Not assigned A I 1 AH I 1 Analog input A1 12 AI2 12 Analog input 2 13 Al3 13 Analog input LCC HMI L C E Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal source Modbus Integrated Modbus Hn CANopen A n Integrated CANopen n E E Com card Communication option board source P RP P Motor voltage A IU 1 Al virtual 1 Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial A Al virtual 2 11 2 Virtual analog input 2 by the communication bus 1 OAO01 HR H 1 Function blocks Analog Output 01 HH OA10 OAR 10 Function blocks Analog Output 10 SAI Summing ref 3 No 1 Selection of a reference to be added to Ref 1 channel F or Ref 1B channel F Ib Identical to Summing ref 2 5 A 2 page 153 Subtract ref 2 No n 0 Selection of a reference to be subtracted from Ref 1 channel F or Ref 1B channel F Ib Identical to Summing ref 2 5 2 page 153 51 28692 03 2010 153 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting alla Sl Subtract ref 3
233. g for the first time or after restoring the factory settings the drive must initially be started outside the slowdown and stop zones in order to initialize the function Forward slowdown zone Forward slowdown N Forward stop zone Forward stop 210 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Operation with long cams In this instance there is no restriction which means that the function is initialized across the whole trajectory Forward slowdown zone Forward slowdown Forward stop zone 5 Forward stop Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch This function can be used to control the stopping of the moving part automatically once a preset distance has been traveled after the slowdown limit switch On the basis of the rated linear speed and the speed estimated by the drive when the slowdown limit switch is tripped the drive will induce the stop at the configured distance This function is useful in applications where one manual reset overtravel limit switch is common to both directions It will then only respond to help management if the distance is exceeded The stop limit switch retains priority in respect of the function The Deceleration type 25 parameter can be configured to obtain either of the functions described below Frequency Deceleration type d 5 F Standard 5 d Slowdown fr
234. g input 1 with the jog dial A AI Virtual 2 Virtual input via communication bus to be configured via AI2 net channel 2 page 122 I OAO01 HR H 1 Function blocks Analog Output 01 HH OA10 OA 10 Function blocks Analog Output 10 202 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Iz JE IE Analog limit act taken into account Identical to Torque limit activ E L page 202 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 The limitation is specified by the Motoring torque lim M and Gen torque lim G parameters if Torque limit activ E L A is not No o D No limitation if Torque limit activ E L A set to No D If the assigned input or bit is at 1 The limitation depends on the input assigned by Torque ref assign A A Note If Torque limitation L A and Torque ref assign are enabled at the same time the lowest value will be This parameter cannot be accessed if Torque limit activ L is set to No n 0 Yes YE 5 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the SETTINGS 5 menu These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the c
235. g operation or when stopped 51 28692 03 2010 157 Configuration Mode ConF STOP CONFIGURATION Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Flin APPLICATION FUNCT continued SEE STOP CONFIGURATION Note Some types of stops cannot be used with all other functions Follow the instructions on page 148 Type of stop Ramp stop Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command Note If the brake logic function on page 179 has been enabled or if Low speed time out L 5 page 83 or 199 is not 0 only ramp type stops may be configured Ramp stop Stop on ramp F SE Fast stop F 5 E Fast stop n SE Freewheel 5 Freewheel stop dL 1 DC injection d 1 DC injection stop Available only if Motor control type page 92 is not set to Sync mot 5 Freewheel stop Thd 0 2 to 599 Hz 0 2 Hz Speed threshold below which the motor will switch to freewheel stop This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to a freewheel stop below a low speed threshold Q This parameter be accessed if Type of stop 5 is set to Fast stop F 5 E or Ramp stop and if Brake assignment 5 L or Auto DC injection d are configured 1 Freewheel stop ass No n 1 The stop is activated when the input or
236. gle shift measurement and speed estimation accuracy H Ir HF current level 0 to 200 50 Ratio for the current level of the high frequency injection signal It has an influence on the noise during angle shift measurement and speed estimation accuracy PSI align curr max Auto A LI 0 to 30096 Auto A U 0 Current level in of Nominal 5 for PSI align 1 and PSIO align P 5 O angle shift measurement modes This parameter has an impact on the inductor measurement PSI align curr max is used for tune operation This current must be equal or higher than the maximum current level of the application otherwise instability may occur If PSI align curr max r is set to Auto A U E D PSI align curr max 15096 of Nominal sync n 5 during the tune operation and 100 of Nominal sync 5 during angle shift measurement in case of standard alignment PSI align P 5 1 or PSIO align P 5 0 0 to 200 25 Injection level align Current level in of Nominal I sync 5 for high frequency phase shift angle measurement IPMA type 51 28692 03 2010 103 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting y de Boost level align 0 to 200 10096 Current level in of Nominal I sync r 5 for high frequency phase shift angle measureme
237. gsnul Reference or A 0 0 or A 0 1 rP2 1 0 rP3 1 1 rP4 A predictive speed reference can be used to initialize the speed on restarting the process 192 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Scaling of feedback and references Min PID feedback IF Max PID feedback F 2 parameters be used to scale the PID feedback sensor range This scale MUST be maintained for all other parameters e Min PID reference P 1 Max PID reference 2 parameters can be used to scale the adjustment range for example the reference The adjustment range MUST remain within the sensor range The maximum value of the scaling parameters is 32 767 To facilitate installation we recommend using values as close as possible to this maximum level while retaining powers of 10 in relation to the actual values Example see graph below Adjustment of the volume in a tank between 6 m and 15 m Sensor used 4 20 mA 4 5 m for 4 mA and 20 for 20 mA with the result that P F 4 500 and P IF 2 20 000 Adjustment range 6 to 15 m with the result that 6 000 min reference and P 2 15 000 max reference Example references rP1 internal reference 9 500 rP2 preset reference 6 500 rP3 preset reference 8 000 preset reference 11 200 The 3 4 DISPLAY CONFIG menu can be used to customize the name of the unit displayed and its
238. he Acceleration or Acceleration 2 A 2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 Begin Acc round This parameter can be accessed if the Ramp type E is Customized 1 5 1 Begin Dec round 0 to 10096 1096 Rounding of start of deceleration ramp as a of the Deceleration d E or Deceleration 2 d E 2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 Q This parameter be accessed if the Ramp type P E is Customized 1 5 1 ERY End Dec round 0 to 100 1096 Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a of the Deceleration d or Deceleration 2 d E 2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 Begin Dec round H 3 Q This parameter can be accessed if the Ramp type is Customized 1 5 1 Ramp 2 threshold 0 to 599 Hz according to rating 0 Hz Ramp switching threshold The 2nd ramp is switched if the value of Ramp 2 threshold is not 0 0 deactivates the function and the output frequency is greater than Ramp 2 threshold F r Threshold ramp switching can be combined with Ramp switch ass P 5 switching as follows LI or bit Frequency Ramp 0 lt 0 gt 2 2 1 lt 2 2 1 gt 2 2 fe PS Ramp switch ass No n 0 Identical to Ref 1B channel F Ib 152
239. ical to Stop FW limit sw 5 A F above SAL Stop limit config Active low L 0 A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL If Stop limit config 5 A L is set to Active high 5 the stop command will be activated on active signal stop order will not be given if signal is not applied for any reason Do not select Active high H 5 unless you are sure that your signal will be present any case Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Level stop switch activation This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one stop sensor has been assigned It defines the positive or negative logic of the bits or inputs assigned to the stop Active low L O Stop controlled a falling edge change from 1 to 0 of the assigned bits or inputs H IG Active high H 5 Stop controlled on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned bits or inputs dHF Slowdown forward No 0 Slowdown attained forward Identical to Stop FW limit sw 5 A F above Slowdown reverse No n 0 Slowdown attained reverse Identical to Stop FW limit sw 5 A F above dAL Slowdown limit cfg Active low L 0 CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT If Slowdown limit cfg d A L is set to Active high 5 the slowdown command will be activated on active signal slowdown o
240. ified during operation or when stopped 168 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF SPEED Two types of operations are available Use of single action keys Two logic inputs are required in addition to the operating direction s The input assigned to the speed command increases the speed the input assigned to the speed command decreases the speed Use of double action keys Only one logic input assigned to speed is required speed with double press buttons Description 1 button pressed twice 2 steps for each direction of rotation A contact closes each time the button is pressed Released speed 1st press speed maintained 2nd press faster Forward button aandb Reverse button candd Example of wiring ATVeee control 1 Forward terminals Reverse Lly speed Motor frequency LSP 0 LSP Forward 219 press 174 0 Reverse 219 press 1 nd press 0 Do not use this speed type with 3 wire control Whichever type of operation is selected the max speed is set by High speed H 5 see page 75 Note If the reference is switched via Ref 2 switching see page 140 from any one reference channel to another reference channel with speed the value of reference Output frequency r after ramp may be copied at the same time in accordance with the Copy chan
241. iguration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FAULT MANAGEMENT continued AUTO TUNING FAULT ET Autotune fault mgt Freewheel 4 E 5 n 0 Ignore 2 Detected fault ignored YE 5 Freewheel 5 Freewheel stop 1 Because in this case the detected fault does not trigger a stop it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output to its indication These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 51 28692 03 2010 249 Configuration Mode ConF Card pairing Function can only be accessed in Expert r mode This function is used to detect whenever a card has been replaced or the software has been modified in any way When a pairing password is entered the parameters of the card currently inserted are stored On every subsequent power up these parameters are verified and in the event of a discrepancy the drive locks in HCF fault mode Before the drive can be restarted you must revert to the original situation or re enter the pairing password The following parameters are verified The t
242. imotors is set to Yes 5 the motor thermal state of each motor is not memorized when power is switched off To continue to protect the motors it is required to Perform auto tuning on each motor every time the power is switched on or Use an external overload protection on each motor Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage No B Multiconfiguration possible Yes 5 Multimotor possible E rs Ti No n 2 Configurations Switching of 2 motors or 2 configurations No 5 O No switching LI1 L Logical input LI1 C See the assignment conditions on page 138 mdp t 3 Configurations No 0 Switching of 3 motors or 3 configurations Identical to 2 Configurations n F page 220 Note In order to obtain motors or configurations 2 Configurations n F 1 must also be configured 220 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF AUTO TUNING BY LOGIC INPUT Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting E APPLICATION FUNCT continued AUTO TUNING BY LI E fU TE Auto tune assign No n 0 Auto tuning is performed when the assigned input or bit changes to 1 Note Auto tuning causes the motor to start up n O No O Not assigned LI1 L Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions pag
243. in speed mode the limits are defined by the Low speed L 5 P and High speed H 5 parameters Bit 12 and Bit 13 Reserved 0 Bit 14 Stop key STOP via stop key 0 STOP key not pressed 1 Stop triggered by the STOP key on the graphic display terminal or the remote display terminal Bit 15 Direction direction of rotation 0 Forward rotation at output 1 Reverse rotation at output The combination of bits 0 1 2 4 5 and 6 defines the state in the DSP 402 state chart see the Communication manuals Possible values in the I O profile Note The value is identical in the CiA402 profile and the I O profile In the I O profile the description of the values is simplified and does not refer to the CiA402 Drivecom state chart Bit 0 Reserved 0 or 1 Bit 1 Ready 7 0 Not ready 1 Ready Bit 2 Running 0 The drive will not start if a reference other than zero is applied 1 Running if a reference other than zero is applied the drive can start Bit 3 Fault 7 0 No fault 1 Fault Bit 4 Power section line supply present 7 0 Power section line supply absent 1 Power section line supply present Bit 5 Reserved 1 Bit 6 Reserved 0 or 1 Bit 7 Alarm 0 No alarm 1 Alarm Bit 8 Reserved 0 Bit 9 Command via a network 0 Command the terminals or the graphic display terminal 1 Command via a network 51 28692 03 2010 51 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Unit
244. ing to configuration of Type of stop 5 page 158 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel for example according to 2 3 wire control and 2 wire type page 112 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop L F F fallback spd L Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 r L 5 Spd maint L 5 The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred as long as the detected fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop Stop on ramp F SE Fast stop 5 E Fast stop dL injection 2 DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 150 244 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FLE FAULT MANAGEMENT continued fe fle TORQUE OR I LIM DETECT Sy Sy le limit stop Ignore 0 Behavior the event of switching to torque or current limitation n O Ignore 2
245. injection PSIO align P 5 O Pulse signal injection Optimized Standard optimized alignment mode by pulse signal injection The phase shift angle measurement time is reduced after the first run order or tune operation even if the drive has been turned off No align O No alignment 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the SETTINGS 5 menu These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped To change the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2 s 51 28692 03 2010 175 Configuration Mode ConF BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL Used to control an electromagnetic brake by the drive for horizontal and vertical hoisting applications and for unbalanced machines Principle Vertical hoisting movement Maintain motor torque in the driving load holding direction during brake opening and closing in order to hold the load start smoothly when the brake is released and stop smoothly when the brake is engaged Horizontal movement Synchronize brake release with the build up of torque during startup and brake engage at zero speed on stopping to help to prevent jolting Reco
246. ins at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false 1 0 to 9 999 ms then 10 00 to 60 00 s on the integrated display terminal 51 28692 03 2010 125 Configuration Mode ConF Use of analog output AO1 as a logic output Analog output AO1 can be used as a logic output by assigning DO1 In this case when set to 0 this output corresponds to the AO1 min value 0 V or 0 mA for example and when set to 1 to the AO1 max value 10 V or 20 mA for example The electrical characteristics of this analog output remain unchanged As these characteristics are different from logic output characteristics check that it is still compatible with the intended application Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting ES a INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG continued dU I 001 CONFIGURATION dU DO1 assignment n 1 Identical to R1 Assignment page 123 with the addition of shown for information only as these selections can only be configured in the APPLICATION FUNCT menu b L C Brk control b L Brake contactor control LLC Input cont L L Line contactor control OCC Output cont 5 Output contactor control End reel End of reel traverse control function E 5 4 wobble 5 Counter wobble synchronization O DC charging
247. ion interruption on the Check the communication bus CANopen bus Check the time out Refer to the CANopen User s manual External fit LUBit Event triggered by an external Check the device which caused the trip and reset device depending on user External fault com Event triggered by a communication Check for the cause of the trip and reset network FB stop fit Function blocks have been stopped Check FB Stop mode F b 5 configuration while motor was running Out contact open The output contactor remains open Check the contactor and its wiring although the closing conditions have Check the feedback circuit been met 1 input contactor The drive is not turned on even Check the contactor and its wiring though Mains V time out L Check the time out has elapsed Check the line contactor drive connection 4 20mA loss Loss of the 4 20 mA reference on Check the connection on the analog inputs analog input AI3 Overbraking Braking too sudden or driving load Increase the deceleration time Install a braking resistor if necessary Activate the Dec ramp adapt 5 function page 157 if itis compatible with the application Line voltage too high Check the line voltage Drive overheat Drive temperature too high Check the motor load the drive ventilation and the am
248. ip Hysteresis Freq Att 0 3 to 599 Hz 0 3 Hz Maximum deviation between the frequency reference and the motor frequency which defines steady state operation 51428692 03 2010 251 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Underload Managmt Freewheel 5 Behavior on switching to underload detection n 0 Ignore 2 Detected fault ignored YES Freewheel 5 Freewheel stop Ramp stop Stop on ramp F SE Fast stop 5 E Fast stop FEL Underload T B Rest 0 to 6 min 0 min This parameter cannot be accessed if Underload Mangmt U d is set to Ignore D Minimum time permitted between an underload being detected and any automatic restart In order to allow an automatic restart the value of Max restart time A page 234 must exceed this parameter by at least one minute These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 51 28692 03 2010 252 Configuration Mode ConF Process overload detected fault A process overload
249. is configuration both simplifies and extends use via the communication interface Commands may be sent via the logic inputs on the terminals or via the communication bus When commands are sent via a bus they are available on a word which acts as virtual terminals containing only logic inputs Application functions can be assigned to the bits in this word More than one function can be assigned to the same bit Note Stop commands from the graphic display terminal or remote display terminal remain active even if the terminals are not the active command channel 51 28692 03 2010 131 Configuration Mode ConF Reference channel for Not separ 5 Separate 5 and I O profile 5 configurations PID not configured Ref 1B switching Ref 1 channel Fr Ref 1B chan Summing ref 2 Multiplier ref 3 naa FRA SA2 SA3 dA2 dA3 x MA2 x MA3 Ref 2 channel OV nO iu 4 Note Forced local is not 12 active profile 1 1 LFr 4 1 Graphic display terminal LCC 1 i LI Y 1 1 og operation 1 speed around a reference PID REGULATOR c l z nO LI PID not assigned 5 o 1 nO i i Low speed 5 Forced local Key Parame
250. is parameter is only accessible in this menu on 3 phases drives If one phase disappears the drive switches to fault mode Input phase loss but if 2 or 3 phases disappear the drive continues to operate until it trips on an undervoltage detected fault the drive trips in Input phase loss P H F if there is an input phase loss and if this leads to performance decrease See Input phase loss P L page 238 n 0 Ignore O Detected fault ignored to be used when the drive is supplied a single phase supply or by the DC bus 5 Freewheel 5 With freewheel stop eleg Rated motor power According to drive rating Rated motor power given on the nameplate in kW if Standard mot freq b F r is set to 50Hz IEC 5 2 in HP if Standard mot freq b F r is set to 60Hz NEMA 0 See Rated motor power n P r page 94 lin5 Rated motor volt 100 to 480 V According to drive rating Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate ATV32eeeM 2 100 to 240 V ATV32eeeN4 200 to 480 V See Rated motor volt 5 page 94 nLr Rated mot current 0 25 to 1 5 In 1 According to drive rating and Standard mot freq 5 F Rated motor current given on the nameplate See Rated mot current page 94 Rated motor freq 10 to 599 Hz 50 Hz Rated motor frequency given on the nameplate The factory setting is 50 Hz or preset to 60 Hz if Stand
251. isplay disappears completely then switching on again Automatically in the scenarios described for the AUTOMATIC RESTART function page 234 By means of a logic input or control bit assigned to the FAULT RESET 5 function page 232 By pressing the STOP RESET key on the graphic display keypad if the active channel command is the HMI see channel 1 d 1 page 140 290 1 28692 03 2010 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Fault detection codes which require a power reset after the detected fault is cleared The cause of the detected fault must be removed before resetting by turning off and then back on H5F bhrF 5UF 5PF and E detected faults can also be cleared remotely by means of a logic input or control bit Fault reset 5 parameter page 232 Detected Fault Name Probable cause Remedy H5F Angle Error For the law Sync 5 wrong Check the speed loop parameters setting of the speed loop when the Check the motor phases and the maximum current allowed reference goes through 0 by the drive Brake feedback The brake feedback contact does not Check the feedback circuit and the brake logic control match the brake logic control circuit The brake does not stop the motor quickly Check the mechanical state of the brake enough detected by measuring the Check the brake lining
252. itoring Mode MOn Code Name Description Unit Itti al im 1 2 MONITORING continued PASSWORD HMI Password If you have lost your code please contact Schneider Electric State Status of the drive lock unlock Information parameter cannot be modified L E Locked L The drive is locked by a password ULC Unlocked U L The drive is not locked by a password IE fij rs PIN code 1 Confidential code Enables the drive configuration to be protected using an access code When access is locked by means of a code only the parameters in the 1 2 MONITORING 7 and 1 1 SPEED REFERENCE menus be accessed The MODE key be used to switch between menus Note Before entering a code do not forget to make a careful note of it OFF No access locking codes To lock access enter a code 2 to 9 999 The display be incremented using the jog dial Then press ENT ON appears on the screen to indicate that access has been locked code is locking access 2 to 9 999 To unlock access enter the code incrementing the display using the jog dial and press ENT The code remains on the display and access is unlocked until the next time the drive is turned off Access will be locked again the next time the drive is turned on If an incorrect code is entered the display changes to ON and acce
253. l input Reference 100 e eocca conce tennant 1 voltage input 1 0 Min value Max value 20 or Range 0 100 10V Reference 4 100 geese ji 1 Current or voltage 1 Min value pur 096 value 20 or 10 V 1 1 1 1 100 100 gt 100 51 28692 03 2010 117 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG continued CANE LAI CONFIGURATION EST Reference template Standard 5 5 d b Sd Standard 5 5 d Frequency HSP LSP 100 Reference 096 100 7 At zero reference the frequency LSP LSP HSP bL 5 Pedestal b L 5 Frequency HSP 22 5 At reference 0 to LSP the frequency LSP b n 5 Deadband 5 n 5 Frequency HSP e Reference 100 At reference 0 to LSP the frequency 0 HSP bn50 Deadband 0 bn 5 0 This operation is the same as Standard b 5 d except that in the following cases at zero reference the frequency 0 HSP The signal is less than Min value which is greater than 0 example 1Vona2 10 V input signal is greater than Min value which is greater than Max value example 11 V on a 10 0 V input Frequency LSE If the input range is configured as bidirectional
254. lel and high performance levels may require SVC V U L L Voltage 4 Unger ade eec UO Frequency Note UO is the result of an internal calculation based on motor parameters and multiplied by UFr 96 UO can be adjusted by modifying UFr value 92 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting UF 5 VIF 5pts 5 5 segment V F profile As Standard 5 d profile but also supports the avoidance of resonance saturation Voltage UNS UB 0000000 o 1 The profile is defined by the eee ee TUE values of parameters UnS 5 1 U1 to U5 and F1 to F5 1 1 Ut 4 FrS gt F5 gt F4 gt F3 gt F2 gt F1 U2 Vue UO og EE d L1 gt Frequency F1 F2 F3 FA S 5 Fr Note UO is the result of an internal calculation based on motor parameters and multiplied by UFr 96 UO can be adjusted by modifying UFr value 5 mot 5 For synchronous permanent magnet motors with sinusoidal electromotive force EMF only This selection makes the asynchronous motor parameters inaccessible and the synchronous motor parameters accessible UF 9 Quad U F 3 Variable torque For pump and fan applications d Energy Sav L d Energy savi
255. level 2 0 1 In 2 to DC inject level 1 0 5 In 2 Tarj CAUTION Q RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating 1 3 Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode once period of time DC injection time 1 d has elapsed This parameter can be accessed if Type of stop 5 is set to DC injection dC or if DC injection assign dC 1 is not set to No D i DC injection time 2 0 1 to 30s 0 58 CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Long periods of DC injection braking can cause overheating and damage the motor Protect the motor by avoiding long periods of DC injection braking 1 3 Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Maximum injection time DC inject level 2 d C 2 for injection selected as stop mode only This parameter be accessed if Stop type 5 is set to DC injection dL 1 rad fre Dis operat opt code Ramp stop Disable operation stop mode n SE Freewheel 5 Disable drive function Ramp stop Ramp stop then disable drive function 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the SETTINGS 5 E menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation m
256. lication is running n 0 No o B Function blocks application is controlled by FB command F b d parameter 5 Yes 5 Function blocks application switches to Run automatically at drive power on L I L LI 11 Function blocks application switches to Run on a rising edge of the logic input It switch to Stop on falling edge of the logic input 6C See the assignment conditions page 138 not OL10 010 0110 10 Stop mode Freewheel 5 A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL If FB stop mode F 5 5 is set to No 0 the motor will not stop when the program will be stopped Do not select these values unless exterior stopping methods exist Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Allows to setup the way of working of the drive when function blocks are stopped n Ignore O The drive ignores the detected fault HE 5 Freewheel 5 Motor stops in freewheel Ramp stop Ramp stop F 5E Fast stop F 5 E Fast stop dL 1 injection dL 1 DC injection FbdF drive fault Stop 5E Behavior of function blocks when the drive trips 5 Stop 5 E Function blocks stops when the drive trips outputs are realeased IE n Ignore E 5 Function blocks continue to work when the drive trips except CFF an
257. logic input It defines the positive or negative logic of the input assigned to the detected fault Active low L O Trip on falling edge change from 1 to 0 of the assigned input Active high H IL Trip on rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned input 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting EPL External fault mgt Freewheel 5 Type of stop in the event of an external fault n 0 Ignore O External fault ignored 5 Freewheel 5 Freewheel stop SEE STT 5 Stop according to configuration of Type of stop 5 page 158 without tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel for example according to 2 3 wire control and 2 wire type E E E page 112 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop L F F fallback spd L Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 r L 5 Spd maint L 5 The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred as long as the detected fault is present a
258. lphanumeric digits on the product According to bluetooth driver device name must not exceed 14 digits Digits n 14 amp 15 will not be displayed through bluetooth network Mac Read only information accessible with graphic display terminal XX XX XX XX XX XX This information is also available on the label in front of the product Un Bluetooth Activation OFF OF F Activation of the integrated Bluetooth OFF Integrated Bluetooth deactivated ON O n Integrated Bluetooth activated EEUE nl 5 tb dui Bluetooth Visibility Bluetooth Visibility Condition No 0 No O Not assigned No drive Drive in fault state Yes 5 Yes LI1 L 1 Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions page 138 Eng PIN code 0 to 9 999 0 Bluetooth PIN code from 0 to 9 999 Example In order to set a pin code like 0001 just set 1 COMMUNICATION continued CANopen OFF CANopen address OFF OF F to127 OFF OFF OFF 1 to 127 bod lO 50 250 500 CANopen bit rate 50 kbps 5 50 000 Bauds 125 kbps 2 5 125 000 Bauds 250 kbps 250 250 000 Bauds 500 kbps 500 500 000 Bauds Mbps 7 1 MBauds 250 kbps 2 5 7
259. ly hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in death serious injury or equipment damage A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in injury or equipment damage CAUTION CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in equipment damage The word drive as used in this manual refers to the controller portion of the adjustable speed drive as defined by NEC Electrical equipment should be installed operated serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this product 2010 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 51 28692 03 2010 About the Book About the Book Document scope The purpose of this document is to help you to set up the drive show you how to program the drive show you the different menus modes and parameters help you in maintenance and diagnostics Validity note This documentation is valid for the Altivar 32 drive Related documents Title of Documentation Reference Number ATV32 Quick Start 51 41715 ATV32 Installation manual 51428686 ATV32 Modbus manual S1A28698 ATV32 CANopen manual 1 28699 ATV32 Communication Parameters 1 44568 A
260. made is indicated English Example Only one language can be chosen Chinese T rkce Code Name Description Factory setting 3 2 LANGUAGE Language 0 L n E 0 Current language index L n GO Language 0 L n 50 L n 4 Language 9 L AG 9 9 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 264 51 28692 03 2010 Interface ItF Monitoring Configuration MCF This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal RDY Term 0 0Hz 00 3 INTERFACE 3 1 ACCESS LEVEL 3 2 LANGUAGE 3 3 MONITORING CONFIG PARAM BAR SELECT Code lt lt gt gt Quick This can be used to configure the information displayed on the graphic display screen during operation RUN Term 0 0Hz 00 3 3 MONITORING CONFIG PARAM BAR SELECT MONITOR SCREEN TYPE COM MAP COMFIG PARAM BAR SELECT Selection of 1 to 2 parameters displayed on the top line the first 2 cannot be modified MONITOR SCREEN TYPE Selection of parameters displayed in the centre of the screen and the display mode digital values or bar graph format COM MAP CONFIG Selection of the words displayed and their format 51 28692 03 2010 265 Interface ItF Code Name Description 3 3 MONITORING CONFIG Code Name Description Pb5 PARAM BAR SELECT
261. mage Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode lm I Q 1 3 DC injection time 1 0 1 to 30s 0 56 CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Long periods of DC injection braking can cause overheating and damage the motor Protect the motor by avoiding long periods of DC injection braking Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Maximum current injection time DC inject level 1 d After this time the injection current becomes DC inject level 2 dL 2 1 3 DC inject level 2 0 1 In 2 to DC inject level 1 4 0 5 In 2 CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode once period of time DC injection time 1 d has elapsed 254 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Is c b DC injection time 2 0 1 to 30s 0 5 RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Long periods of DC injection braking can cause overheating and damage the motor Protect the motor by avoiding long periods of DC injection braking 1 3 Failure
262. mal protection Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Type of stop in the event of a motor thermal trip n O Ignore O Detected fault ignored HE 5 Freewheel 5 Freewheel stop SEE STT 5 Stop according to configuration of Type of stop 5 page 158 without tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel for example according to 2 3 wire control and 2 wire type page 112 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop L F F fallback spd L Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has not been removed 2 r L 5 Spd maint L 5 The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred as long as the detected fault is present and the run command has not been removed 2 Ramp stop Stop on ramp F SE Fast stop 5 E Fast stop dL injection 2 1 DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 150 Mot THR memo No 0 Motor thermal state memorization n E
263. matic restart to be possible the value of Max restart time A page 234 must exceed that of this parameter by at least one minute See page 252 GME Q 70 to 150 of Rated mot current 5 Ovld Detection Thr 11096 Overload detection threshold as a of the rated motor current Rated mot current r This value must be less than the limit current in order for the function to work See page 253 Visible only if Ovid Time Detect O L is not set to 0 This parameter is used to detect an application overload This is not a motor or drive thermal overload FEU Q 0 to 6 min 0 min Overload T B Rest Minimum time permitted between an overload being detected and any automatic restart In order for an automatic restart to be possible the value of Max restart time page 234 must exceed that of this parameter by at least one minute See page 253 90 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LbL Load correction 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz Rated correction in Hz See Load correction 1 page 109 Fan Mode Standard 5 d CAUTION RISK OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE o If Fan Mode is set to Never 5 P the fan of the drive will not be active Life time of Electronic component will be reduced Check that the am
264. menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 51 28692 03 2010 183 Configuration Mode ConF EXTERNAL WEIGHT MEASUREMENT Load measurement This function uses the information supplied by a weight sensor to adapt the current Brake release FW 5 r of the BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL 5 function The signal from the weight sensor can be assigned to an analog input usually a 4 20 mA signal or to the pulse in input according to the type of weight sensor Example Measurement of the total weight of a hoisting winch and its load The current Brake release FW b is adapted in accordance with the curve below Ibr Pd 4 2 2 1 1 1 1 Point 1x 0 LL Weight sensor signal Point 2x 100 Zero load LP2 Point 1y 2 1 P d 184 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting APPLICATION FUNCT continued EIS EXTERNAL WEIGHT MEAS RIES Weight sensor ass No n 1 A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL Check that Point 1 X L 1 Point 2x L Point 1Y 1 and Point 2Y 2 are correctly set to avoid loss of control of the load being lifted Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury
265. meter Codes Code CUSTOMER SETTING a E p 6 9 ne z 2 x z 9 g B B9 8 i P i g 6 2 3 08 a gt Q z E lt 9 lt 2 2 2 2 Be Ba Ba be 9 520 z 05 et jes 1 45 wt SES 69 Sf 81 161 180 Sale 82 162 SPE 78 105 EF 213 5 49 82 106 106 SH2 229 SHY 229 5 104 5 78 105 SLL 244 SLP 78 105 5155 48 SATE 101 Bat 228 50 107 SP pg 84 167 SPII 84 167 5 12 84 167 SP 85 167 5P 85 167 SP 15 85 167 SP IB 85 167 84 166 5P3 84 166 SPY 84 166 SPS 84 166 SP6 84 166 SPI 84 166 SPB 84 167 5PS 84 167 SPb 103 SPF 103 SPLE T8 105 SPGU 78 105 SPI 173 5rb 90 251 253 SP 85 172 TS 48 314 51428692 03 2010 Index of Parameter Codes CUSTOMER SETTING 331 102 NOILLVOINnIWWO2 N N N NI 114 LN3W39 VNVW LNV 241 239 240 rn o S NI E NR
266. mit switch function and this input is at zero the drive can only be started up by sending a command for the opposite direction see page 209 If the reference channel or command channel is assigned to a communication bus when the power supply is connected the drive will display Freewheel 5 and remain in stop mode until the communication bus sends a command Code fal li Name Description DIAGNOSTICS This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal It displays detected faults and their cause in plain text and can be used to carry out tests see page 58 Clearing the detected fault In the event of a non resettable detected fault Disconnect all power including external control power that may be present Lock all power disconnects in the open position Wait 15 minutes to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge the drive LEDs are not indicators of the absence of DC bus voltage Measure the voltage of the DC bus between the PA and PC terminals to ensure that the voltage is less than 42 Vdc If the DC bus capacitors do not discharge completely contact your local Schneider Electric representative Do not repair or operate the drive Find and correct the detected fault Restore power to the drive to confirm the detected fault has been rectified In the event of a resettable detected fault the drive can be reset after the cause is cleared By switching off the drive until the d
267. mmended settings for brake logic control for a vertical hoisting application A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL Check that the selected settings and configurations will not result in the dropping or loss of control of the load being lifted Follow the recommandations below Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Brake impulse 5 P Yes 5 Ensure that the direction of rotation FW corresponds to lifting the load For applications in which the load being lowered is very different from the load being lifted set b P 2 Ibr for example ascent always with a load and descent always without a load Brake release current Brake release FW b and Brake release I Rev 2 if Brake impulse b IP 722 Ib Adjust the brake release current to the rated current indicated on the motor During testing adjust the brake release current in order to hold the load smoothly Acceleration time For hoisting applications it is advisable to set the acceleration ramps to more than 0 5 seconds Ensure that the drive does not exceed the current limit The same recommendation applies for deceleration Reminder For a hoisting movement a braking resistor should be used Brake Release time 5 Set according to the type of brake It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release Brake release frequency 5 r in open loop mode only Leave in
268. n OF No fault No detected fault memorized ASF Angle error A 5 Angle setting detected fault b L F Brake control 4 L Brake s motor 3 phases loss F Brake feedback b Brake contactor detected error C FF Incorrect config F Invalid configuration at power on 12 Bad conf Configuration transfer detected error nF Com network NET option communication interruption OF CAN com CANopen communication interruption C r F Capa charg Load relay detected fault C SF Ch sw fault 5 F Channel switching detected error dC F fault d C Differential current detected fault dL F Load fault d L Dynamic load detected error EEF I Control EEprom E E F 1 Control EEprom detected error Power Eeprom E F 2 Power EEprom detected error External fault LI Bit E P F External detected fault from LI or local link E PF g External fault com 2 External interruption from communication board F b E FB fault Function block detected error F b E 5 stop F b E 5 Function block stop detected error I Out contact stuck F 1 Output contactor closed contactor Out contact open F C F 2 Output contactor opened contactor HE F Cards pairing H F Hardware configuration detected error HdF IGBT desaturation
269. n entered 2 m Download rights Unlock dL 1 Writes the current configuration to the drive or downloads a configuration to the drive dL r 0 Locked drv dL O A configuration file can only be downloaded to the drive if the drive is protected by an access code which is the same as the access code for the configuration to be downloaded dL r I Unlock dL 1 A configuration file can be downloaded to the drive or a configuration in the drive can be modified if the drive is unlocked access code entered or is not protected by an access code dL Not allowed d L 2 Download not authorized dL r 3 Lock unlock d L 3 Combination of Locked drv d L O and Unlock dL x 1 282 1 28692 03 2010 Multipoint Screen Multipoint Screen Multipoint Screen Communication is possible between a graphic display terminal and a number of drives connected on the same bus The addresses of the drives must be configured in advance the COMMUNICATION menu using the Modbus Address d d parameter page 257 When a number of drives are connected to the same graphic display terminal it automatically displays the following screens CONNECTION IN PROGRESS VXXXXXX MULTIPOINT ADDRESSES Selection of drives for multipoint dialog select each address and check the box by pressing ENT This screen only appears the first time the drive is powered up
270. n made is indicated by y Example Only one language can be chosen When multiple selection is possible the selections made are indicated by Example A number of parameters can be chosen to form the USER MENU RDY Term 0 0Hz 0 0 Acceleration E 51s Min 0 00 Max 99 99 9 15 Min 0 00 Max 99 99 The lt lt and gt gt arrows keys F2 and F3 are used to select the digit to be modified and the jog dial is rotated to increase or decrease this number Example visualization of function blocks state RDY 2 Term 0 0Hz 00 Acceleration E 51s Min 0 00 Max 99 99 Q OFF light A valid function blocks program is in the ATV32 in stop mode 69 ON light A valid function blocks program is in the ATV32 in run mode The drive is considered as being in running state and configuration parameters cannot be modified 51 28692 03 2010 25 Overview Powering up the drive with Graphic display terminal for the first time When powering up the graphic display terminal for the first time the user has to select the required language O LANGUAGE Display after the graphic display terminal has been powered up for the first time English Select the language and press ENT Chinese Y ENT Schneider The drive s rating details will now appear Electric ATV32HU15M2 1 5kW 2HP 220V Single Config n 0 1 3 seconds 00Hz 00 Y ENT RDY
271. n the detected fault occurred as long as the detected fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop Stop on ramp F SE Fast stop 5 Fast stop dL 1 injection dL 1 DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 148 51 28692 03 2010 243 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting COL CANopen fault mgt Freewheel 5 A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL If CANopen fault management Unld Thr 0 Speed is set to Ignore n O communication control will be inhibited For safety reasons inhibiting the communication interruption detection should be restricted to the debug phase or to special applications Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication interruption with integrated CANopenG n Ignore 2 Detected fault ignored YE 5 Freewheel 4 E 5 Freewheel stop STT 5 E E Stop according to configuration of Type of stop 5 page 158 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel for example according to 2 3 wire control
272. nd the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop Stop on ramp SE Fast stop F 5 E Fast stop dL DC injection 1 DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 150 FAULT MANAGEMENT continued US GE UNDERVOLTAGE MGT 5 UnderV fault mgt Std fault 7 Behavior of the drive in the event of an undervoltage D Std fault 2 The drive trips and the external fault signal is triggered the fault relay assigned to No drive flt F L will be opened Flt wo relay The drive trips but the external fault signal is not triggered the fault relay assigned to No drive flt F L remains closed 2 Alarm 2 Alarm and fault relay remain closed The alarm can be assigned to a logic output or a relay lir E Mains voltage According to drive voltage According to drive voltage rating rating Rated voltage of the line supply in V For ATV32eeeM2 200 200V 200 200 Volts AC 220 220V 220 220 Volts AC 230 230V ac 2 30 230 Volts AC 2 240V ac 2 240 Volts AC For ATV32eeeN4 3HU 380V ac 350 380 Volts AC 400 400V ac 4 0 0 400 Volts AC 440 440V ac 4 4 0 440 Volts AC A60V ac 5 2 460 Volts AC 5 500V ac 5 500 Volts AC factory setting USL Undervoltage level 100 to 276 V Acc
273. nding to the total power and select the shorter length Example Two 7 5 kW 10 HP motors Take the lengths on the 15 KW 20 HP table row which are shorter than those on the 7 5 kW 10 HP row and divide by the number of motors to obtain the length per motor with unshielded GORSE cable and SOP 6 the result is 40 2 20 m maximum for each 7 5 kW 10 HP motor In special cases for example different types of cable different motor powers in parallel different cable lengths in parallel etc we recommend using an oscilloscope to check the overvoltage values obtained at the motor terminals To retain the overall drive performance do not increase the SOP value unnecessarily Tables giving the correspondence between the SOP parameter and the cable length for 400 V line supply Altivar 32 Motor Cable cross Maximum cable length in meters section min Reference Power Unshielded GORSE cable Shielded GORSE cable Shielded BELDEN cable Type H07 RN F 4Gxx Type GVCSTV LS LH Type 2950x kW HP SOP 10 SOP 8 SOP 6 SOP 10 SOP 8 SOP 6 SOP 10 SOP 8 SOP 6 ATV32HO37N4 10 37 0 50 1 5 14 100 m 70m 45m 105 m 85m 65m 50m 40m 30m ATV32HO55N4 0 55 0 75 1 5 14 100 m 70m 45m 105 m 85m 65m 50m 40m 30m ATV32HO75N4 0 75 1 15 14 100 m 70m 45m 105 m 85m 65m 50m 40m 30m ATV32HU11N4 1 1 1 5 1 5 14 100 m
274. nds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate 2 On the integrated display unit O to 9 999 then 10 00 to 65 53 10 000 to 65 536 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped T 2s the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2 s 102 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Synchronous motor Expert mode Q 1 Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting sym SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR r5H5 Cust stator R syn 0 to 65 535 mOhm 0 mOhm Cold state stator resistance per winding The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto tuning operation if it has been performed The value can be entered by the user if he knows it 195 Autotune L d axis Axis d stator inductance in mH per phase On motors with smooth poles Autotune L d axis L 95 Autotun 0 to 655 35 mH 0 mH e L q axis 1 95 Stator inductance The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto tuning operation if it has been performed 195 Autotune L q axis
275. nel 1 gt 2 parameter see page 141 If the reference is switched via Ref 2 switching see page 140 from one reference channel to any other reference channel with speed the value of reference Output frequency F r after ramp is copied at the same time This helps to prevent the speed being incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes place 51 28692 03 2010 169 Configuration Mode ConF Code FUn UNF Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting APPLICATION FUNCT continued SPEED This function can be accessed if reference channel Ref 2 channel is set to Speed U P d E see page 140 Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 148 speed assignment No n 0 Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1 No O Not assigned LI1 L Logical input LI1 C See the assignment conditions page 138 d5P Speed assignment No n 0 See the assignment conditions on page 138 Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1 SEF nl Reference saved No n 1 Associated with the speed function this parameter can be used to save the reference When the run commands disappear saved to RAM When the line supply or the run commands disappear saved to EE
276. ng For applications that do not require high dynamics 51 28692 03 2010 93 Configuration Mode ConF Asynchronous motor parameters Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting ASHE ASYNC MOTOR Only visible if Motor control type E page 92 is not set to Sync mot 5 Rated motor power According to drive rating According to drive rating This parameter cannot be accessed if Motor control type page 92 is set to Sync mot 5 Rated motor power given on the nameplate in kW if Standard mot freq 5 F is set to 50Hz IEC 50 in HP if Standard mot freq 5 F is set to 60Hz NEMA 0 Cas Motor 1 Cosinus Phi 0 5 to 1 According to drive rating Nominal motor cos phi This parameter can be accessed if Motor param choice is set to Mot Cos 5 lin5 Rated motor volt 100 to 480 V According to drive rating and Standard mot freq 5 F This parameter cannot be accessed if Motor control type page 92 is set to Sync mot 5 Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate nLr Rated mot current 0 25 to 1 5 In 1 According to drive rating and Standard mot freq 5 F This parameter cannot be accessed if Motor control type page 92 is set to Sync mot 5 Rated motor current given on the nameplate Pps Rated mo
277. ng by sensors e page 212 1 Priority is given to the first of these two stop modes to be activated 2 Only the multiplier reference is incompatible with the PID regulator e Incompatible functions Compatible functions Not applicable Priority functions functions which cannot be active at the same time 1 The function indicated by the arrow has priority over the other 150 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Incompatible Functions The following function will be inaccessible or deactivated after an Automatic restart This is only possible for control type if 2 3 wire control is set to 2 wire 2 and if 2 wire type E E E is set to Level L E L or Fwd priority 2 See 2 3 wire control page 73 The 1 2 MONITORING N menu page 41 can be used to display the functions assigned to each input in order to check their compatibility When a function is assigned a appears on the graphic display terminal as illustrated in the example below RDY Term 0 0Hz 0A APPLICATION FUNCT REFERENCE SWITCH REF OPERATIONS RAMP STOP CONFIGURATION AUTO DC INJECTION If you attempt to assign a function that is incompatible with another function that has already been assigned an alarm message will appear With the graphic display terminal INCOMPA
278. nitoring for the Pulse input speed feedback Speed fdback loss 5 P F n No 2 No monitoring of speed feedback 0 1 Hz to 599 Hz Adjustment of the motor frequency threshold for tripping a speed feedback detected fault difference between the estimated frequency and the measured speed Pulse thd wo Run No 5 1 Activation and adjustment of brake failure monitoring Brake feedback b F If brake logic control Brake b L page 179 is not configured this parameter is forced to No 2 n 0 D No brake monitoring 1Hz to 1 000 Hz Adjustment of the motor frequency threshold for tripping a brake failure trip detection of speeds other than 0 Pulse wo Run delay 0 0 s to 10 0 s 0 0s Time delay for taking brake failure trip into account 51 28692 03 2010 247 Configuration Mode ConF Load variation detection This detection is only possible with the High speed hoisting function It can be used to detect if an obstacle has been reached triggering a sudden upward increase or downward decrease in the load Load variation detection triggers a Dynamic load fault d The Dyn load Mgt d L b parameter can be used to configure the response of the drive in the event of this detected fault Load variation detection can also be assigned to a relay or a logic output There are two possible detection modes depending on
279. nne n nnn 256 Access MI 260 Chapter 6 Interface oe nei te ide C C DOR cl eg xD a c la DOS ee 261 Access Level LAG s e aca hag ee AR CR 262 Language au ax x RO RR ORO Ie e d OUR ECC On GR CR 264 Monitoring Configuration 265 Display configuration 269 Chapter 7 Open Saye as 277 Chapter 8 Password COQ ndo ani C RC RE Roe RE 281 Chapter 9 Multipoint Screen ec edie ee exon xS RR E RR RR a 283 Maintenance and Diagnostics 285 Chapter 10 Maintenance sas i eats ii dd eee SRDS Seas eevee 287 Chapter 11 Diagnostics and 289 EO IP 290 Clearing the detected fault 25555655 e ck FAS EY VOR 290 Fault detection codes which require a power reset after the detected fault is cleared 291 Fault detection codes that can be cleared with the automatic restart function after the cause has disappeared 293 Fault detection codes that are cleared as soon as their cause disappears 295 1 28692 03 2010 Table of Contents Option card changed
280. nnel for I O profile 7 configuration Separate reference and command as in Separate 5 P configuration The command channels d and 92 are independent of the reference channels Fr lb and Cmd channel 1 Ld Profile Cmd switching Forced local Forward CMD Reverse STOP Graphic display STOP YES terminal E d Ej 1 Stop Key priority Cmd channel 2 Key Parameter E The black square represents the factory setting assignment except for Profile Cd tds Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card A command or an action can be assigned To a fixed channel by selecting an L input or a Cxxx bit By selecting for example L 3 this action will be triggered by L 3 regardless of which command channel is switched By selecting for example 2 4 this action will be triggered by integrated CANopen with bit 14 regardless of which command channel is switched Toa switchable channel by selecting a CDxx bit By selecting for example d 1 this action will be triggered by L Ig ifthe terminals channel is active I1 liftheintegrated Modbus channel is active integrated CANopen channel is active 4 1 1 ifthe communication card channel is active If the active channel is the graphic display terminal the fun
281. nnot be modified Default A 5 The default values are used to control the motor Measure 5 The values measured by the auto tuning function are used to control the motor Custom 1 5 The values set manually are used to control the motor Note Tune of the motor will increase significantly the performances 51 28692 03 2010 95 Configuration Mode ConF nl JES Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting EUnU Auto tuning usage Therm Mot This parameter shows the way used to modify the motor parameters according to its estimated thermal state n No D No thermal state estimation Therm Mot Statoric thermal state estimation based on nominal current and current consumed by the motor Cold tun Statoric thermal state estimation based on statoric resistance measured at the first cold tune and tune done at each power up ALUE Automatic autotune No n 0 ADANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH When Automatic autotune is changed from No O Autotune will be performed every time the power will be switched on Check this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury The motor must be stopped when switching on the drive Automatic autotune U is forced to Yes 5 if Au
282. ns Hoisting H 5 E diagram Forward Reverse i 27 222 p 2 ATV eee R2 L2 L3 1 24 12 Electromagnetic brake 1 Whithout integrated safety function a contact on the Preventa module must be inserted in the brake control circuit to engage it when the Safe Torque Off safety function is activated see connection diagrams in the Installation manual 72 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Full Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting IE TEL Gd de 1 3 CONFIGURATION FULL FULL Ec SIMPLY START Ier fr 2 3 wire control 2 wire 22 125 DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION When this parameter is changed Reserve assign 5 and 2 wire type parameters and all the assignments involving the logic inputs will revert to their default values Check that this change is compatible with the wiring diagram used Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 2 3 wire control page 112 2 wire 2 E 2 wire control level commands This is the input state 0 or 1 or edge 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 which controls running or stopping Example of source wiring LI1 forward HAE EB reverse JC 3 wire 3 3 wire control pulse commands A forward or reverse pulse is sufficient to command starting a stop pulse is sufficient to command stop
283. nt SPMA type 1 On the integrated display unit O to 9 999 then 10 00 to 65 53 10 000 to 65 536 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 9 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 104 51 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 15 MOTOR CONTROL continued Speed prop gain 0 to 1 000 40 Speed loop proportional gain Visible if Motor control type E is not set to Standard 5 d V F 5pts U F 5 or Quad U F 9 Q SPEU UF inertia comp 0 to 1 000 40 Inertia factor for following motor control laws Visible if Motor control type E is set to Standard 5 VIF 5pts U F 5 or Quad U F 9 5 Speed time integral 1 to 65 535 ms 63 ms Speed loop integral time constant Visible if Motor control type E is not set to Standard 5 d V F 5pts U F 5 V F Quad U F 9 SFC K speed loop filter 0 to 100 65 Speed filter coefficient O IP to 100 Spd est filter time 0 to 1
284. ntactor ass No 5 0 Logic output or control relay n E No B Function not assigned in this case none of the function parameters can be accessed LE 1 101 1 Logical output LO1 R2 Relay r2 dO I d01 d 7 1 Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO1 assignment page 129 is set to No 5 D IRES Drive lock No n 1 This parameter can be accessed if Line contactor ass L L is not set to No D The drive locks when the assigned input or bit changes to 0 n EU No a D Function inactive L I I LH L Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions page 138 INTE Mains V time out 5 to 999 s 5s Monitoring time for closing of line contactor If once this time has elapsed there is no voltage on the drive power circuit the drive will lock with a Line contactor L detected fault These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 206 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF OUTPUT CONTACTOR COMMAND This allows the drive to control a contactor located between the drive and the motor The request for the cont
285. o follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Standstill injection time This parameter be accessed if Auto DC injection A d is not set to No D If Motor control type page 92 is set to Sync mot 5 this time corresponds to the zero speed maintenance time 51 28692 03 2010 161 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 5dLz2 Auto DC inj level 2 0 to 1 2 In 2 0 5 In 2 CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Q Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage 1 2nd level of standstill DC injection current This parameter be accessed if Auto DC injection A d is not No D EdL 2 Auto DC inj time 2 0 to 30s 0s CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Long periods of DC injection braking can cause overheating and damage the motor Protect the motor by avoiding long periods of DC injection braking Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage 2nd standstill injection time This parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection A dL is set to Yes YE 5 AdC SdC2 Operation YES x SdC1 SdC2 i tdC1 tdC1 tdc2 t 1 Ct 0 SdC1 SdC2 1 Run command
286. ode Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting d nl 5 HF inj activation No 0 Activation of high frequency signal injection in RUN This function allows to estimate the motor speed in a view to have torque at low speed without speed feedback Note The more the saliency is high the more the HF inj activation 1 function will be efficient In order to ensure the performances it could be necessary to adjust the speed loop parameters speed loop filter 5 F Speed time integral 5 and Speed prop gain 5 P see page 105 and the speed estimation phase locked loop Expert parameters HF pll bandwith 5 P 5 and HF plil dump factor 5 see page 103 High frequency injection is not efficient with low saliency motors see Saliency mot state 5 7 7 E page 101 It is advised to have 4 kHz of pwm frequency Switching freq 5 r In case of instability with no load it is advised to decrease Speed prop gain 5 P 5 and HF pll bandwith 5 P b Then adjust the speed loop parameters to have the dynamic behavior and the PLL gains to have a good speed estimation at low speed In case of instability with load it could help to increase the Angle error Comp parameter mainly for SPM motor No 5 Function deactivated Yes 8 E 5 High frequency injection is used for speed estimation 1 In correspo
287. ode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 12 12218 0101 Product reset assig No n 0 DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION This configuration enables to reset the drive Check this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury This parameter can only be modified if 3 1 ACCESS LEVEL L AL is set to Expert P mode Drive reinitialization via logic input Can be used to reset all detected faults without having to disconnect the drive from the power supply The drive is reinitialized on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned input The drive can only be reinitialized when locked To assign reinitialization press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s No O Function inactive L 1 Logical input LI1 1161 L 5 Logical input LI6 LAM L A 1 Logical input LAI2 L A 2 Logical input Al2 0101 OL O 1 Function blocks Logical Output 01 OL10 OL 10 Function blocks Logical Output 10 nl TES Product reset No 0 DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION You are going to reset the drive Check this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury This parameter c
288. ode only See DC injection time 2 dL page 160 Auto DC inj level 1 0 to 1 2 In 1 0 7 In 1 CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow these instructions result in equipment damage Level of standstill DC injection current Auto DC injection d is not No O See page 161 EdC Auto DC inj time 1 0 1 to 30s 0 56 CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Long periods of DC injection braking can cause overheating and damage the motor Protect the motor by avoiding long periods of DC injection braking Q Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Standstill injection time This parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection A d is not set to No 0 If Motor control type page 92 is set to Sync mot 5 this time corresponds to the zero speed maintenance time See page 161 51 28692 03 2010 81 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 524 2 Auto DC inj level 2 0 to 1 2 In 1 0 5 In 1 CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Q Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage
289. on b is not set to No D Adjustment of the motor magnetizing current at low speed as a of the rated magnetizing current This parameter is used to increase or reduce the time taken to establish the torque It allows gradual adjustment up to the frequency set by Action Boost A b Negative values apply particularly to tapered rotor motors Magnetizing current A Positive Boost 400 Rated magnetizing current Negative Boost 5 T gt Frequency Action Boost F A b 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz Action Boost This parameter be accessed if Boost activation b is not set to No D Frequency above which the magnetizing current is no longer affected by Boost 5 SUL nl ESS Motor surge limit No 0 This function limits motor overvoltages and is useful in the following applications NEMA motors Japanese motors Spindle motors Rewound motors This parameter can remain set to No O for 230 400 V motors used at 230 V or if the length of cable between the drive and the motor does not exceed 4 m with unshielded cables 10 m with shielded cables Note When Motor surge limit 5 U L is set to Yes 5 the maximum switching frequency Switching freq 5 r is modified see page 107 No O Function inactive Yes 5 Function active SOF 10 Volt surge limit opt 10 us
290. onfiguration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting A 11 CONFIGURATION A 11 _ assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions associated with input in order to check for example for compatibility problems n E O Not assigned 1 1 assignment 1 Analog output AO1 1 Ref 1 channel F 1 Reference source 1 Ref 2 channel 2 Reference source 2 5Hg Summing ref 2 5 A 2 Summing reference 2 P PID feedback P F PI feedback PI control AA Torque limitation A A Torque limitation Activation by an analog value d A Subtract ref 2 d A 2 Subtracting reference 2 P Manual PID P 7 Manual speed reference of the PI D regulator auto man PID speed Speed reference of the PI D regulator predictive reference 5H3 Summing ref 3 5 3 Summing reference Fr b Ref 1B channel F Ib Reference source 1B dA 3 Subtract ref 3 d A 3 Subtracting reference F L OC Forced local L Forced local reference source Ref 2 multiplier A 2 Multiplying reference 2 Ref 3 multiplier 3 Multiplying reference 5 Weight input 5 Hoisting External weight measurement function IRE 1 01
291. onfiguration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped Note We recommend that a parameter set switching test is carried out while stopped and a check is made to verify that it has been performed correctly Some parameters are interdependent and in this case may be restricted at the time of switching Interdependencies between parameters must be respected even between different sets Example The highest Low speed L 5 P must be below the lowest High speed H 5 216 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF MULTIMOTORS MULTICONFIGURATIONS Motor or configuration switching MULTIMOTORS CONFIG The drive may contain up to 3 configurations which can be saved using the FACTORY SETTINGS 5 menu page 69 Each of these configurations can be activated remotely enabling adaptation to 20r3 different motors or mechanisms multimotor mode 20r3 different configurations for a single motor multiconfiguration mode The two switching modes cannot be combined Note The following conditions MUST be observed Switching may only take place when stopped drive locked If a switching request is sent during operation it will not be executed until the next stop In the event of motor switching the following additional conditions apply When the moto
292. ons on page 138 InEP Torque increment 1 1 This parameter cannot be accessed if Torque limit activ L is set to No Selection of units for the Motoring torque lim 7 and torque lim 5 parameters 0 1 0 1 50 1 Unit 0 1 1 1 1 Unit 1 EL IH Motoring torque lim 0 to 30096 10096 This parameter cannot be accessed if Torque limit activ L is set to No 2 Torque limitation in motor mode as a or in 0 1 increments of the rated torque in accordance with the Q Torque increment P parameter 1 EL IG Gen torque lim 0 to 300 10096 This parameter cannot be accessed if Torque limit activ L is set to No 2 Torque limitation in generator mode as a or in 0 1 increments of the rated torque in accordance with the Q Torque increment E P parameter 1 ERH Torque ref assign No 5 D If the function is assigned the limitation varies between 0 and 300 of the rated torque on the basis of the 0 to 100 signal applied to the assigned input Examples 12 mA on a 4 20 mA input results in limitation to 150 of the rated torque 2 5 V on a 10 V input results in 7596 of the rated torque n E No O Not assigned function inactive A AH 1 Analog input AI2 2 Analog input 13 AIS 13 Analog input P RP P Pulse input IL 1 AI Virtual 1 A 1 Virtual analo
293. ontactor fails to open at the end of the set time the drive will lock in FCF1 fault mode These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 208 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF POSITIONING BY SENSORS This function is used for managing positioning using position sensors or limit switches linked to logic inputs or using control word bits Slowing down Stopping The action logic for the inputs and bits can be configured on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 ora falling edge change from 1 to 0 The example below has been configured on a rising edge 4 Forward run command Reverse run command Slowdown forward Stop FW limit sw 4 Speed Low speed LSP 0 The slowdown mode and stop mode can be configured The operation is identical for both directions of operation Slowdown and stopping operate according to the same logic described below 51 28692 03 2010 209 Configuration Mode ConF Example Forward slowdown on rising edge Forward slowdown takes place on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the input or bit assigned
294. op Adapted deceleration Stand by output cut Undervoltage alarm e 55 Safety 551 level e 5L 5 Safety SLS level Safety STO level In the event of a detected fault the display will flash to notify the user accordingly If a graphic display terminal is connected the name of the detected fault will be displayed 51 28692 03 2010 33 Overview Structure of the menus Powering up Parameter selection This parameter is only visible when AX A the drive is powered up for the first Ge TENE ec ES time 5 ESC ESC The setting can be amended 5 F e ine D subsequently in the menu po BN MOTOR CONTROL dr E for Esc les Standard mot freq 5 F r NE LEEN 0 0 1 1 SPEED REFERENCE EF 1 2 MONITORING 1 0 n 1 3 CONFIGURATION O n On the 7 segment display a dash after menu and submenu codes is used to differentiate them from parameter codes Example APPLICATION FUNCT menu Acceleration A parameter Selection of multiple assignments for one parameter Example List of group 1 alarms in INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG O menu A number of alarms can be selected by checking them as follows a isse es sal selected not selected The
295. op configuration 158 B E Function blocks see dedicated document B 51428692 03 2010 21 Overview Safety functions Fault management Functions Page Applications o P ss 5 E o S 8 5 9 I I z Safe Torque Off STO Safety function see dedicated E Bl E document Deferred stop on thermal alarm 240 B Alarm handling 130 B gl B Fault management 232 IGBT tests 242 E El Catch spinning load 235 Motor protection with probes 232 E gl Undervoltage management 241 4 20 mA loss 242 Bl BI B Uncontrolled output cut output phase loss 238 BH Automatic restart 234 Bg Use of the Pulse input input to measure the speed of 246 Bl rotation of the motor Load variation detection 248 Underload detection 251 Overload detection 253 El Safety Integrated functions see dedicated document Bl EB B Bl Bl 22 1 28692 03 2010 Overview Basic functions Drive ventilation The fan starts automatically when the drive thermal state reaches 7096 of the maximum thermal state and if the Fan Mode F is set to Standard 5 d 51 28692 03 2010 23 Overview Graphic display terminal option Description of the graphic display terminal With the graphic display termin
296. operation remains Reference identical to Standard b 5 d LSP 10096 This parameter defines how the speed reference is taken into account for analog inputs and Pulse input only In the case of the PID regulator this is the PID output reference HSP The limits are set by the Low speed 1 5 and High speed 5 parameters page 75 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 118 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Delinearization For analog inputs only The input can be delinearized by configuring an intermediate point on the input output curve of this input For range 0 100 Reference 10054 Current Interm point Y 4 voltage 0 Min value Interm point X Max value 20 mA or 096 100 10V Note For Interm point X 0 corresponds to Min value and 100 to Max value For range 100 100 Reference 4 100 1 i 1 Interm point Y assidu ee Min value Interm point X Current or 100 voltage input id 0 Interm point Max value 20 mA or X 100 10V point Y been 100 51428692 03 2010 119 C
297. or bit is at 1 manual operation is active n E No a O Not assigned L L Logical input See the assignment conditions page 138 la lE ra Acceleration 2 0 00 to 6 000 s 3 5s Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor 5 To have repeatability in ramps the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application Q Ramp AC2 is only active when the PID function starts up and during PID wake ups 1 198 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Ie Du Manual reference No 6 0 Manual speed input This parameter can be accessed if Auto Manual assign is not set to No 0 The preset speeds are active on the manual reference if they have been configured 0 No B Not assigned 1 AH 1 1 Analog input A1 2 AI2 12 Analog input 2 3 3 Analog input 1 Pulse input AI virtual 1 A U 1 Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial OA01 OAD 1 Function blocks Analog Output 01 HH OA10 OA Function blocks Analog Output 10 5 Low speed time out 0 to 999 9 s 0s Maximum operating time at Low speed L 5 see Low speed L 5 page 75 Following operation at Low speed L 5 P for a defined period a m
298. ording to drive rating Undervoltage fault level setting in Volts The factory setting is determined by the drive voltage rating LIESTE Undervolt time out 0 2 s to 999 9 s 0 25 Time delay for taking undervoltage detected fault into account UnderV prevention No 5 0 Behavior in the event of the undervoltage prevention level being reached n E No B No action I1 115 DC Maintain 7 7 5 This stop mode uses the inertia to maintain the DC bus voltage as long as possible Ramp stop Stop following an adjustable ramp Max stop time 5 L nF Lock out L n F Lock freewheel stop without trip UnderV restart tm 1 0 s to 999 9 s 1 05 Time delay before authorizing the restart after a complete stop for UnderV prevention 5 Ramp stop if the voltage has returned to normal 51 28692 03 2010 241 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Prevention level 133 to 261 V According to drive rating Undervoltage prevention level setting in Volts which can be accessed if UnderV prevention SE P is not No 5 O The adjustment range and factory setting are determined by the drive voltage rating and the Mains voltage E 5 value Max stop time 0 01 to 60 00 s 1 00 8 Ramp time if UnderV prevention 5 E P is set to Ramp sto
299. orresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 51 28692 03 2010 203 Configuration Mode ConF 2ND CURRENT LIMITATION Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting APPLICATION FUNCT continued 2nd CURRENT LIMIT IL fg Current limit 2 No 1 If the assigned input or bit is at O the first current limitation is active If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the second current limitation is active n E No o O Function inactive L I I LH Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 138 I Limit 2 value 0 to 1 5 In 1 1 5 In 1 RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR AND THE DRIVE Check that the motor will withstand this current particularly in the case of permanent magnet synchronous motors which are susceptible to demagnetization Check that the profile mission complies with the derating curve given in the installation manual Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Second current limitation This parameter can be accessed if Current limit 2 L is not set to No 0 The adjustment range is limited to 1 5 In Note Ifthe setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss L fa
300. orward and Brake release Rev 4 for Reverse for certain specific applications Ibr Brake release FW 0 to 1 36 In 2 0A Brake release current threshold for ascending or forward movement This parameter be accessed if Weight sensor ass 5 is set to No O page 185 1 Ir d Brake release Rev 0 to 1 36 In 2 0A Brake release current threshold for descending or reverse movement This parameter can be accessed if Brake impulse b 15 setto 2 IBR 2 Brake Release time 0 to 5 00 s 0s Brake release time delay Q 1 51 28692 03 2010 179 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting b Ir Brake release freq Auto A 0 to 10 Hz Auto A U E 0 Brake release frequency threshold initialization of acceleration ramp This parameter can be accessed if Movement type b 5 page 179 is set to Hoisting U E Q 1 HL E O Auto A U E The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor calculated using the drive parameters 0 to 10 Hz Manual control bEn Brake engage freq Auto A U E 0 Auto A U E 0 0 to 10 Hz Brake engage frequency threshold Note Brake engage freq b E n cannot be higher than Low speed L 5 1 HL E O Auto A U E O The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip
301. ot be accessed Advices The drive must be chosen to have enough current according to the need of behavior but not too much to have enough accuracy in the current measurement especially with the high frequency signal injection see HF inj activation page 102 Once the drive is chosen Enter the motor nameplate Perform the tune Adjust Syn EMF constant 5 to have optimal behavior few current the motor in case of no load Note Performances may be higher on high saliency motors by activating high frequency injection function see HF inj activation 1 page 102 Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting mi MOTOR CONTROL continued SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR nLr5 Nominall sync 0 25 to 1 5 In 1 According to drive rating Rated synchronous motor current given on the nameplate Pee Pole pairs 1 to 50 According to drive rating Number of pairs of poles on the synchronous motor mass Nom motor spdsync 0 to 48 000 rpm According to drive rating Rated motor speed given on the nameplate 2 fe GUS Motor torque 0 1 to 6 553 5 Nm According to drive rating Rated motor torque given on the nameplate 51 28692 03 2010 99 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting EUn nl SESS E E de Auto tuning No n 0 ADANGER HAZARD OF ELEC
302. otor stop is requested automatically The motor will restart 1 if the reference is greater than Low speed 1 5 and if a run command is still present Note A value of 0 indicates an unlimited period of time If Low speed time out L 5 is not 0 Type of stop 5 E page 158 is forced to Ramp stop only if a ramp stop can be configured ic EL PID wake up thresh 0 0 to 100 0 0 A DANGER X 2 UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that unintended restarts will not present any danger Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury If the PID and Low speed operating time Low speed time out L 5 functions are configured at the same time the PID regulator may attempt to set a speed lower than Low speed L 5 This results in unsatisfactory operation which consists of starting operating at low speed then stopping and so on Parameter PID wake up thresh 5 L restart error threshold can be used to set a minimum PID error threshold for restarting after a stop at prolonged Low speed 1 5 PID wake up thresh 5 L is a percentage of the PID error value depends Min PID feedback F 1 and Max PID feedback F 2 see Min PID feedback IF page 196 The function is inactive if Low speed time out E L 5 0 or if PID wake up thresh 51 0 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the SETTINGS
303. p Q Eb5 DC bus maintain tm 1 to 9 999 s 9 999 s DC bus maintain time if UnderV prevention 5 P is set to DC Maintain 7 7 5 Q FAULT MANAGEMENT continued IE IGBT TESTS Sie ir fe IGBT test No n 0 n O No 0 No test HE 5 Yes 5 The IGBTs are tested on power up and every time run command is sent These tests cause a slight delay a few ms In the event of a detected fault the drive will lock The following faults can be detected Drive output short circuit terminals U V W SCF display IGBT inoperable xtF where x indicates the number of the IGBT concerned IGBT short circuited x2F where x indicates the number of the IGBT concerned IP iL je FAULT MANAGEMENT continued 4 20mA LOSS 4 20mA loss Ignore D n 0 Ignore O Detected fault ignored This is the only possible configuration if AI3 min value L 3 page 121 is not greater than 3 mA 5 Freewheel 5 Freewheel stop SEE STT 5 Stop according to configuration of Type of stop 5 page 158 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel for example according to 2 3 wire control and 2 wire type E E E page 112 if control is via
304. page 89 Freq meter Alarm 9L Measured speed threshold attained Pulse warning thd 9L page 89 Dynamic load alarm d Load variation detection see DYNAMIC LOAD DETECT dL d page 248 See the multiple selection procedure on page 33 for the integrated display terminal and page 24 for the graphic display terminal ALARM GRP2 DEFINITION y Identical to ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION A page 130 ALARM GRP3 DEFINITION Identical to ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION A page 130 130 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Command The parameters in the COMMAND E L menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present Command and reference channels Run commands forward reverse stop etc and references can be sent using the following channels Command Reference Terminals logic inputs LI or analog inputs used as logic inputs LA Terminals analog inputs Al pulse input Function blocks Function blocks Remote display terminal Remote display terminal Graphic display terminal Graphic display terminal Integrated Modbus Integrated Modbus Integrated CANopen Integrated CANopen Communication card Communication card speed via the terminals speed via the graphic display terminal DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION When analog inputs or AI2 2 are used as logic inputs LAI1
305. peed 0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz Motor frequency at maximum reference can be between Low speed L 5 and Max frequency The factory setting changes to 60 Hz if Standard mot freq 5 F r is set to 60Hz NEMA H5Peg High speed 2 0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz Visible if 2 High speed 5 H 2 is not set to No 0 Q Identical to High speed H 5 page 229 H5P3 High speed 3 0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz Visible if 4 High speed 5 is not set to No D Q Identical to High speed H 5 page 229 5 High speed 4 0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz Visible if 4 High speed 5 is not set to No D Q Identical to High speed H 5 page 229 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed 51 28692 03 2010 229 Configuration Mode ConF Fault Management With integrated display terminal Summary of functions Code Name Page PEE PTC MANAGEMENT 232 PSE FAULT RESET 232 HEr AUTOMATIC RESTART 234 AIS ALARMS SETTING 234 Flir CATCH ON THE FLY 235 EHE MOTOR THERMAL PROT 23
306. pen amp n E E Com card Communication card if inserted p di tf Min PID feedback 0 to Max PID feedback IF 2 2 100 Value for minimum feedback 1 Max PID feedback Min PID feedback P IF to 32 767 2 1 000 Value for maximum feedback 1 Min PID reference Min PID feedback P to 150 PID reference 2 2 Minimum process value 1 P Max PID reference Min PID reference P to 900 Max PID feedback IF 2 2 Maximum process value 1 e qu Act internal PID ref No n O Internal PID regulator reference n E No O The PID regulator reference is given by Ref 1 channel F 1 or Ref 1B channel Ib with summing subtraction multiplication functions see the diagram on page 192 HES5 Yes 5 The PID regulator reference is internal via Internal PID P 1 196 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting rPI Internal PID ref Min PID reference to 150 Max PID reference IP 2 Internal PID regulator reference This parameter can also be accessed in the 1 2 MONITORING 7 O n menu TUS PID prop gain 0 01 to 100 1 Proportional gain r IL PID integral gain 0 01 to 100 1 Integral gain PID derivative gain 0 00 to
307. peration FPS Preset spd2 F P 5 Press the key to run the drive at the 2nd preset speed Preset speed 2 5 P 2 page 84 Press STOP to stop the drive F P 52 Preset spd3 F P 5 2 Press the key to run the drive at the 3rd preset speed Preset speed 3 5 P 3 page 84 Press STOP to stop the drive I PIDref 2 F Pr 1 Sets a PID reference equal to the 2nd preset PID reference Preset ref PID 2 P 2 page 86 without sending run command Only operates if Ref 1 channel F set to HMI L Does not operate with the T K function F Pr PID ref 3 P 2 Sets a PID reference equal to the 3rd preset PID reference Preset ref PID 3 3 page 87 without sending run command Only operates if Ref 1 channel F is set to HMI L Does not operate with the T K function F u 5P speed F U 5 P Faster only operates if Ref 2 channel 2 is set to HMI L Press the key to run the drive and increase the speed Press STOP to stop the drive F d 5P speed F d 5 P Slower only operates if Ref 2 channel 2 is set to HMI L and if a different key has been assigned to speed Press the key to run the drive and decrease the speed Press STOP to stop the drive T K Command via the display terminal Takes priority over switching 5 and over Ref 2 switching
308. ping Example of source wiring Wee 3 24 LI2 Lix LI1 stop 112 forward E reverse Macro configuration Start Stop 5 5 A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION 2s Check that the selected macro configuration is compatible with the wiring diagram used Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury See Macro configuration page 70 SE 5 Start Stop 5 5 Start stop H d M handling Handling HSE Hoisting H 5 E Hoisting GE n Gen Use E General use P Id PID regul 144 PID regulation n E E Network C 5 Communication bus 51 28692 03 2010 73 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LEFL Customized macro Read only parameter only visible if at least one macro configuration parameter has been modified n No a 0 No 5 Yes 5 Yes Standard mot freq 50Hz 50 This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters Rated motor volt U n 5 below High speed H 5 page 75 Freq threshold d page 89 Rated motor freq 5 Max frequency 50 50Hz IEC 5 2 Drive 50 Hz 60Hz NEMA 50 Drive 60 Hz TUUS Input phase loss Yes or No according to drive rating Th
309. play terminal SISIE Torque current lim Switch to torque or current limitation Check if there are any mechanical problems Check the parameters of TORQUE LIMITATION BL page 202 and the parameters of the TORQUE OR I Id page 245 je INF IGBT overheat Drive overheated Check the size of the load motor drive Reduce the switching frequency Wait for the motor to cool before restarting Proc underload FIt Process underload Check and remove the cause of the underload Check the parameters of the PROCESS UNDERLOAD d function page 251 294 51 28692 03 2010 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Fault detection codes that are cleared as soon as their cause disappears Detected Fault Name Probable cause Remedy Incorrect config Option card changed or removed Check that there are no card errors n the event of the option card being changed removed deliberately see the remarks below Control block replaced by a control block Check that there are no card errors configured on a drive with a different In the event of the control block being changed rating deliberately see the remarks below current configuration is inconsistent e Return to factory settings or retrieve the backup configuration if it is valid see page 69 Invalid config Invalid configuration Check the configu
310. put or bit is at 1 If an LI or a bit has not been assigned or if the assigned LI or bit is 0 when run command is sent fluxing occurs when the motor starts n No O Not assigned L I L LH 1 Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 138 174 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting ASIE nl Angle setting type PSIO align P 5 10 Mode for measuring the phase shift angle Visible only if Motor control type E is set to Sync mot 5 PSI align P 5 and PSIO align P 5 O are working for all type of synchronous motors SPM align 5 P and IPM align P increase performances depending on the type of synchronous motor IPM align P Alignment for IPM motor Alignment mode for Interior buried Permanent Magnet motor usually this kind of motor has a high saliency level It uses high frequency injection which is less noisy than standard alignment mode SPM align 5 P N Alignment for SPM motor Mode for Surface mounted Permanent Magnet motor usually this kind of motor has a medium or low saliency level It uses high frequency injection which is less noisy than standard alignment mode PSI align 5 1 Pulse signal injection Standard alignment mode by pulse signal
311. quickly use the index of functions page 299 Before configuring a function read carefully the Function compatibility section page 150 4 In the SETTINGS 5 menu adjust the following parameters Acceleration A page 75 and Deceleration E page 75 e Low speed 1 5 page 75 and High speed H 5 P page 77 Mot therm current E H page 75 Note The following operations must be performed for optimum drive performance in terms of accuracy and response time Enter the values indicated on the motor rating plate in the MOTOR CONTROL dr menu page 92 Perform auto tuning with the motor cold and connected using the Auto tuning parameter page 75 5 Start the drive 14 51 28692 03 2010 Setup Preliminary recommendations Before powering up the drive Start up Line contactor A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Read and understand this manual before installing or operating the ATV32 drive Any changes made to the parameter settings must be performed by qualified personnel Check that all logic inputs are inactive to avoid any unintended operation Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Note When factory settings apply and during power up manual reset or after a stop command the motor can only be powered once the forward reverse and DC injection stop commands have been reset
312. r 3 seconds 1 1 SPEED REFERENCE Select the menu and press ENT 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 CONFIGURATION Y 10 seconds RDY Term 0 0Hz 0 0 Frequency ref Automatically switches to the monitoring screen after 10 seconds 1 3 Hz Min 599 0 Max 599 0 28 1 28692 03 2010 Overview Identification menu The IDENTIFICATION 5 d menu can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal This is a read only menu that cannot be configured It enables the following information to be displayed Drive reference power rating and voltage Drive software version Drive serial number Safety function status and checksum Function blocks program and catalogue version Type of options present with their software version Graphic display terminal type and version RUN Term 50 0Hz 0 0 MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 IDENTIFICATION 3 INTERFACE 4 OPEN SAVE AS 5 PASSWORD FFFFFFFFF Product V1 1 IE 01 SAFETY FUNCTIONS Drive Safety status Standard Safe param CRC 8529 FUNCTION BLOCKS Prg format version 1 Catalogue version 1 OPTION 1 No option GRAPHIC TERMINAL GRAPHIC S V1 21E07 00000000000000000 51 28692 03 2010 Overview Remote display terminal option Description of the remote display terminal This remote display terminal is a local control unit which can be mounted on the door of the wall mounted or floor standing enclosure It has a cable with connectors which is
313. r via the bus or communication network If the function has not been configured the PARAM SET SWITCHING menu and the SET 1 P 5 SET 2 P5 SET 3 P 5 3 submenus will not appear 214 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Ie APPLICATION FUNCT continued ME EE PARAM SET SWITCHING CARAT 2 parameter sets No 5 0 Switching 2 parameter sets n E No 2 Not assigned Freq Th att A Switching via Freq threshold d page 234 2A Freq Th 2 att F 2 A Switching Freq threshold 2 F 2 d page 234 L I L LI Logical input LI1 C See the assignment conditions page 138 CHAE 3 parameter sets No n 0 Identical to 2 parameter sets C HA 1 page 215 Switching 3 parameter sets Note In order to obtain 3 parameter sets 2 parameter sets C HA must also be configured SFS PARAMETER SELECTION This parameter can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal if 2 parameter sets C HA 1 is not set to No 1 Making an entry in this parameter opens a window containing all the adjustment parameters that can be accessed Select 1 to 15 parameters using ENT a then appears next to the parameter Parameter s can also be deselected using ENT Example PARAMETER SELECTION SETTI
314. ration loaded previously F The configuration loaded in the drive via Load a compatible configuration L the bus or communication network is inconsistent 5F Ch Sw fault Switch to not valid channels Check the function parameters Dynamic load fault Abnormal load variation Check that the load is not blocked by an obstacle Removal of a run command causes a reset FB fault Function blocks error See FB Fault F b F E for more details HEF Cards pairing CARDS PAIRING n the event of a card error reinsert the original card function page 250 has been configured Confirm the configuration by entering the and a drive card has been changed Pairing password P P if the card was changed deliberately PHF Input phase loss Drive incorrectly supplied or a fuse Check the power connection and the fuses blown One phase missing 3 phase ATV32 used on a single phase Use a 3 phase line supply line supply Unbalanced load Disable the detected fault by Input phase loss PL This protection only operates with the drive No 0 page 74 on load USF Undervoltage Line supply too low Check the voltage and the parameters of Transient voltage dip UNDERVOLTAGE MGT U 5 b page 241 Option card changed or removed When an option card is removed or replaced by another the drive locks in Incorrect config F fa
315. rder will not be given if signal is not applied for any reason Do not select Active high H 0 unless you are sure that your signal will be present any case Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one slowdown sensor has been assigned It defines the positive or negative logic of the bits or inputs assigned to the slowdown Active low L 2 Slowdown controlled on a falling edge change from 1 to 0 of the assigned bits or inputs H IG Active high H 12 Slowdown controlled on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned bits or inputs 212 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting CLS Disable limit sw No 0 A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL If Disable limit sw C L 5 is set to an input and activated the limit switch management will be inhibited Check that this configuration will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned The action of the limit switches is disabled when the assigned bit or input is at 1 If at this time the drive is stopped or being slowed down by limit switches it will restart up to it
316. reaches 118 of the rated state and reactivation will occur when the state falls back below 90 n Ignore O Detected fault ignored YE 5 Freewheel 5 Freewheel stop SEE STT 5 Stop according to configuration of Type of stop 5 page 158 without tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel for example according to 2 3 wire control and 2 wire type page 112 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop L F F fallback spd L Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has not been removed 2 L 5 Spd maint L 5 The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred as long as the detected fault is present and the run command has not been removed 2 Ramp stop Stop on ramp SE Fast stop 5 E Fast stop dL I DC injection dL 1 DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 148 EHH Drv therm state al 0 to 11896 10096 Trip threshold for drive thermal alarm logic output or relay E 1 The p
317. rence Output contactor command page 172 page 208 Positioning by sensors Reference switching page 212 Reference operations page 152 page 153 High speed hoisting Brake logic control page 190 speed 3 Traverse control page 227 Skip frequency page 168 page 179 Auto DC injection page 161 Catch on the fly page 235 DC injection stop page 158 Fast stop Freewheel stop page 158 page 170 Preset speeds page 165 PID regulator page 196 JOG operation page 163 page 158 Load sharing page 109 Reference operations page 153 gt speed 3 e page 170 Preset speeds P 4 165 PID regulator e e e gt gt gt gt gt Traverse control 227 JOG operation e page 163 Reference switching page 152 1 1 1 gt gt gt gt gt tf t t t t Skip frequency page 168 Brake logic control e 179 Auto DC injection 1 1 1 161 Catch on the fly e page 235 Output contactor e command page 208 DC injection stop e page 158 1 Fast stop 4 page 158 2e Freewheel stop page 158 speed around a e e reference page 172 High speed hoisting page e e e 190 Load sharing e page 109 Positioni
318. rent threshold for attained function assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 123 See page 234 EEH torque thd 300 to 300 100 Q High torque threshold for High tq att H A function assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 123 as a of the rated motor torque See page 234 Low torque thd 300 to 300 50 Low torque threshold for Low tq att A function assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 123 as a of the rated motor torque See page 234 fe silt Pulse warning thd 0 Hz to 20 000 kHz 0 Hz Speed threshold measured by the FREQUENCY METER function page 247 assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 123 See page 235 IF S ral Freq threshold 0 0 to 599 Hz HSP Motor frequency threshold for Freq Th att F E H function assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 123 or used by the PARAM SET SWITCHING N L P function page 215 See page 234 E ya ral Freq threshold 2 0 0 to 599 Hz HSP Motor frequency threshold for Freq Th 2 attain F 2 function assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 123 or used by the PARAM SET SWITCHING 7L P function page 215 See page 234 FFE Freewheel stop Thd 0 2 to 599 Hz 0 2 Hz Speed threshold below which the motor will switch to freewheel stop This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to a freewheel stop below a low speed threshol
319. rip This function can be used to detect worn brake linings Detection of a speed threshold that can be adjusted using Pulse warning thd 9 L page 89 and is assignable to a relay or logic output see page 123 246 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FAULT MANAGEMENT continued FREQUENCY METER REINES Frequency meter No 5 0 Activation of the speed measurement function n E No B Function inactive In this case none of the function parameters can be accessed 5 Yes 5 Function active assignment only possible if no other functions have been assigned to the Pulse input input lE Pulse scal divisor 1 0 to 100 0 1 0 19 Scaling factor for the Pulse input input divisor The frequency measured is displayed by means of the Pulse in work freq 9 5 parameter page 44 Overspd pulse thd No 5 0 Activation and adjustment of overspeed monitoring Overspeed 5 n 0 No B No overspeed monitoring 1Hz to 20 00 kHz Adjustment of the frequency tripping threshold on the Pulse input input divided by Pulse scal divisor F a Pulse overspd delay 0 0 s to 10 0 s 0 0 s Time delay for taking overspeed detected fault into account Level fr pulse ctrl No 5 0 Activation and adjustment of mo
320. ription Unit CMP 1 word Command register of detected fault record 1 same as word 7 d page 50 LCP Motor current A Estimated motor current of detected fault record 1 same as Motor current L page 44 Output frequency Hz Estimated motor frequency of detected fault record 1 same as Output frequency r page 44 rEP Elapsed time h Elapsed run time of detected fault record 1 same as Elapsed time page 56 Mains voltage V Main voltage of detected fault record 1 same as Mains voltage U L n page 44 EHP Motor thermal state 96 Motor thermal state of detected fault record 1 same as Motor thermal state H r page 44 Command Channel Command channel of detected fault record 1 same as Command channel page 50 drL Channelref active Reference channel of detected fault record 1 same as Channel ref active F page 50 EN al FAULT HISTORY continued Shows the 8 last detected faults le e Past fault 2 Identical to Past fault 1 J 1 page 58 Past fault 3 Identical to Past fault 1 J P page 58 dPY Past fault 4 Identical to Past fault 1 2 P page 58 Past fault 5 Identical to Past fault 1 dP page 58 d RE Past fault 6 Identical to Past fault 1 J P 1 page 58 ille 1 Past fault 7
321. rs are switched the power and control terminals concerned must also be switched as appropriate The maximum power of the drive must not be exceeded by any of the motors Allthe configurations to be switched must be set and saved in advance in the same hardware configuration this being the definitive configuration option and communication cards Failure to follow this instruction can cause the drive to lock on an Incorrect config F state Menus and parameters switched in multimotor mode SETTINGS SEE MOTOR CONTROL dr E INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG _ 0 COMMAND EC EL APPLICATION FUNCT F u n with the exception of the MULTIMOTORS CONFIG function to be configured once only FAULT MANAGEMENT L MY MENU USER CONFIG The name of the configuration specified by the user in the FACTORY SETTINGS F 5 menu Menus and parameters switched in multiconfiguration mode As in multimotor mode except for the motor parameters that are common to the 3 configurations Rated current Thermal current Rated voltage Rated frequency Rated speed Rated power IR compensation Slip compensation Synchronous motor parameters Type of thermal protection Thermal state The auto tuning parameters and motor parameters that can be accessed in expert mode Type of motor control Note No other menus or parameters can be switched 51 28692 03 2010 217 Configuration Mode ConF
322. rward 4 1 LI 7 Hl LaL Reverse 4 1 A i dl n 0 No a D Not assigned L I LM 1 10 Logical input LI1 2s TEC See the assignment conditions on page 138 not Cd00 d to Cd15 15 JGF Jog frequency 0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz Reference in jog operation This parameter can be accessed if JOG J is not set to No 2 1 51 28692 03 2010 163 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting JGE Jog delay 0to2 0s 0 5s Anti repeat delay between 2 consecutive jog operations This parameter can be accessed if JOG J is not set to No 2 1 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the SETTINGS 5 menu These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can x also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 2s change the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2 s 164 51 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF PRESET SPEEDS 2 4 8 or 16 speeds can be preset requiring 1 2 3 or 4 logic inputs respectively Note You must configure 2 and 4 speeds in order to obtain 4 speeds
323. s Communication Map 1 Monitoring PEE Monitoring Power time HL r Alarms 1 55 Other state 1 L Ud Password 1 3 CONFIGURATION 5 My Menu F E 5 Factory Settings 8 F LIL L Full 5 Simply Start SEE Settings F b 1 Function Rm Blocks 2 IDENTIFICATION E d 1 INTERFACE 1 3 a 3 1 ACCESS LEVEL L AL 3 2 LANGUAGE L 5 5 8 4 OPEN SAVE AS E A 1 2 5 PASSWORD 1 A single function can be assigned to each input 1 DRIVE MENU d 1 2 MONITORING 5 dLE Diagnostics 1 3 CONFIGURATION L 5 FULL Full dr Motor Control 1 D Inputs Outputs Configuration L EL Command Un Application function FLE Fault Management DITS Communication 3 INTERFACE F 1 3 3 MONITORING CONFIG A single function can be assigned to each input 3 4 DISPLAY CONFIG F 1 Several functions can be assigned to each input Expert parameters Several functions can be assigned to each input 1 Can be accessed only with graphic display terminal 51 28692 03 2010 263 Interface ItF Language LnG RDY Term 0 0Hz 00 When only one selection is possible the selection
324. s Speed on the Pulse input input 1 Charging relay control detected fault or Turn the drive off and then turn on again charging resistor damaged Check the internal connections Contact Schneider Electric Product Support EEF Control Eeprom Internal memory detected fault control Check the environment electromagnetic compatibility block Turn off reset return to factory settings RERA Power Eeprom Internal memory detected fault power Contact Schneider Electric Product Support card FEF I Out contact The output contactor remains closed Check the contactor and its wiring stuck although the opening conditions have Check the feedback circuit been met HdF IGBT desaturation Short circuit or grounding at the drive Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor and the output motor insulation ILF internal com link Communication interruption between Check the environment electromagnetic compatibility option card and drive Check the connections Replace the option card Contact Schneider Electric Product Support InF 1 Rating error The power card is different from the card Check the reference of the power card stored InFe Incompatible PB The power card is incompatible with the Check the reference of the power card and its compatibility control block In FW Internal serial link Communication interruption between the
325. s detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming To change the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2 s 51 28692 03 2010 141 Configuration Mode ConF As the graphic display terminal may be selected as the command and or reference channel its action modes can be configured The parameters on this page can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal and not on the integrated display terminal Comments The display terminal command reference is only active if the command and or reference channels from the terminal are active with the exception of T K command via the display terminal which takes priority over these channels Press T K F E command via the display terminal again to revert control to the selected channel Command and reference via the display terminal are impossible if the latter is connected to more than one drive e The JOG preset speed and speed functions can only be accessed if Profile F is set to Not separ 5 e The preset PID reference functions can only be accessed if Profile F is set to Not separ 5 or Separate 5 E P The T K F command via the display terminal can be accessed regardless of the Profile HL F Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting I m 1 F1 key assignment No 0 n E No O Not assigned F JOG Jog JOG JOG o
326. s it inactive See page 168 Skip Freq Hysteresis 0 1 to 10 Hz 1 Hz Parameter visible if at least one skip frequency Skip Frequency J P F Skip Frequency 2 J 2 or 3rd Skip Frequency J F 3 is different from 0 Skip frequency range between JPF JF and JP F JF H for example This adjustment is common to the frequencies JPF JF 2 JF 3 See page 168 L Un Q Unid Thr Nom Speed 20 to 10096 of 60 Rated mot current r Underload threshold at rated motor frequency Rated motor freq 5 page 74 as a of the rated motor torque Visible only if Unld T Del Detect U L E page 251 is not set to 0 See page 251 Unid Thr 0 Speed 0 to Unld Thr Nom Speed L 096 Underload threshold at zero frequency as a 96 of the rated motor torque Visible only if Unld T Del Detect U L page 251 is not set to 0 See page 251 Unid Freq Thr Det 0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz Underload detection minimum frequency threshold See page 251 Sce 15 Hysteresis Freq Att 0 3 to 599 Hz 0 3 Hz Maximum deviation between the frequency reference and the motor frequency which defines steady state operation See page 251 FEU 0 to 6 min 0 min Underload T B Rest Minimum time permitted between an underload being detected and any automatic restart In order for an auto
327. s section shows only what is possible to do with local or remote display on the drive For advanced configuration using PC software please refer to the dedicated Function blocks manual gt fey FB Status IdL E Idle dL E No binary file in the target the FB is waiting for a download C HECE Check HE E Check the program downloaded SE OP Stop 5 E The Function blocks application is stopped In Init Check coherency between ATVLogic program and Function blocks parameters Un Run The Function blocks application is running r Error r An internal error has been detected The Function blocks application is in fault state mode FbFE FBFault n B No D No detected fault E Internal E Internal detected error b n Binary file 5 Binary file corrupted P Intern Para amp P Internal parameter detected error PH r RW r Parameter access detected error CAL Calculation AL Calculation detected error E DAU AUX E OA U TimeOut AUX task E OF P synch P TimeOut in PRE POST task HdL Bad ADLC A d with bad parameter Input assig Input not configured 2 lar ifs FB IDENTIFICATION bUEr Cust program version 0 to 255 Program user version bn5 Program size 0 to 65 535 Program file size bnU Prg format version 0 to 255 Bin
328. s speed reference n E No 2 Function inactive L I I LH 1 Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 138 PH5 Stop type Ramp stop c This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned Ramp stop Follow ramp SE Fast stop F 5 E Fast stop ramp time reduced by Ramp divider d see Ramp divider d page 81 n SE Freewheel 5 Freewheel stop el SF Deceleration type Standard 5 This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned 5Ed Standard 5 2 Uses the Deceleration d or Deceleration 2 d ramp depending on which has been enabled Optimized The ramp time is calculated on the basis of the actual speed when the slowdown contact switches in order to limit the operating time at low speed optimization of the cycle time the slowdown time is constant regardless of the initial speed SIETA Stop distance No 2 This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned Activation and adjustment of the Stop at distance calculated after the slowdown limit switch function n O No B Function inactive the next two parameters will therefore be inaccessible 0 01 to 10 00 Stop distance range in meters mil 5
329. set PID ref P 2 has been assigned before assigning this function Identical to 2 preset PID ref P 2 page 198 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the function is inactive If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the function is active TRE 2 preset PID ref Min PID reference P IP to 300 PID reference P P 2 2 This parameter can be accessed if Preset ref PID 2 P 2 is assigned 1 rP3 3 preset PID ref Min PID reference P F to 600 Max PID reference P 2 2 This parameter can be accessed if Preset ref PID 3 P 3 is assigned 1 1274 4 preset ref Min PID reference P to 900 Max PID reference P 2 2 This parameter can be accessed if Preset ref PID 4 P 4 is assigned 1 Q E 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the SETTINGS 5 menu 2 If a graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9 999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit for example 15 65 for 15 650 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 200 1 28692 03
330. sime 58 DIAGNOSTICS Leine crt ee roe ru eere nnne 58 sain DC 63 Chapter 5 Configuration Mode 65 tcp DL 66 Organization tree sac dett ard ie des Gre ete god re ree 67 MT Rm 68 S1A28692 03 2010 3 Table of Contents Factory e T 69 Macro Conngqurahion coacta ata AC e UC me CORR ECCE RR TER n 70 QC E m 73 SIMPLY START OE 73 SETTINOS cadit GG Dune 77 MOTOR CONTROL 92 INPUTS OUTPUTS nennen nnn nnne nnne nnn nnne nn nnn nnn nin 112 COMNMIANE a ciet 139 FUNCTION BLOCKS 143 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn 1 eee eeeeeee rene nnn nnn nin 147 REFERENCE SWITCHING ie o bios 152 R F RENCE OPERATIONS see cn carae creta earn anne an ue Coran 153 155 STOP CONFIGURATION ome oun toin inen certae Ponens 158 AUTO DG INJECTION Em 161 Uoc MI Ern P 163
331. ss remains locked Access is unlocked the code remains on the screen To reactivate locking with the same code when access has been unlocked return to ON using the jog dial and then press ENT ON 0 n remains on the screen to indicate that access has been locked To lock access with a new code when access has been unlocked enter the new code increment the display using the jog dial and then press ENT ON appears on the screen to indicate that access has been locked To clear locking when access has been unlocked return to OFF using the jog dial and then press ENT OFF F remains on the display Access is unlocked and will remain so until the next restart COdc code 2 Confidential code 2 Visible if 3 1 ACCESS LEVEL L AL is set to Expert E P r The value OFF F indicates that no password has been set Unlocked L L On The value ON indicates that the drive configuration is protected and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it Once the correct code has been entered it remains on the display and the drive is unlocked until the next time the power supply is disconnected PIN code 2 is unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support ULr Upload rights UL r O Permitted UL O Means that SoMove or the graphic display terminal can save the whole configuration password protections configuration When the
332. ssible Motor parameters are NOT COMPATIBLE Do you want to continue In this case the download is possible but the parameters will be restricted 278 1 28692 03 2010 Open Save as trA DOWNLOAD GROUP None No parameters All All parameters in all menus Drive configuration The entire 1 DRIVE MENU without COMMUNICATION Motor parameters Rated motor volt Un 5 In the MOTOR CONTROL menu Rated motor freq F 5 PSI align curr max Rated motor speed 5 5 Motor 1 Cosinus phi 15 Rated motor power n P Motor param choice Tune selection 5 E Lin Mot therm current IR compensation UF r Slip compensation 51 Cust stator resist 5 Lfw L F H Cust rotor t const E A Nominal sync a 5 Nom motor spdsync 5 5 P 5 Pole pairs P Pn 5 Syn EMF constant P H 5 Autotune L d axis L d 5 Autotune L q axis L 95 Nominal freq sync F 55 Cust stator R syn 5H 5 Motor torque 75 U1 U F1 F 1 U2 U 2 F2 U3 U 3 F3 F 3 U4 U 4 F4 F 4 U5 U 5 F5 F 5 The motor parameters that can be accessed in Expert P mode page 243
333. ssible via graphic display terminal PH2 PDO2 IMAGE View of the RPDO2 and TPDO2 Same structure PDO1 IMAGE Received PDO2 1 First frame of the received PDO2 Received PDO2 2 Second frame of the received PDO2 Received PDO2 3 Third frame of the received PDO2 23 Received PDO2 4 Fourth frame of the received PDO2 Transmit PDO2 1 First frame of the transmit PDO2 Transmit PDO2 2 Second frame of the transmit PDO2 EP23 Transmit PDO2 3 Third frame of the transmit PDO2 E P24 j Transmit PDO2 4 Fourth frame of the transmit PDO2 54 S1A28692 03 2010 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Name Description Unit IE sa dfi CANopen MAP continued CANopen image Only accessible via graphic display terminal PDO3 IMAGE View of the RPDO3 TPDO3 Same structure as PDO1 IMAGE Received PDO3 1 First frame of the received rP3g Received PDO3 2 Second frame of the received PDO3 rP3g Received PDO3 3 Third frame of the received rP33 Received PDO3 4 Fourth frame of the received PDO3 EPJ Transmit PDO3 1 First frame of the transmit PDO3 Transmit PDO3 2 Second frame of the transmit PDO3 EP33 Transmit PDO3 3 Third frame of the transmit PDO3
334. sted but not yet performed Pr OG In Progress P Autotune is in progress FH IL Failed F A 11 Autotune has detected a fault d O n E Done d Un E The motor parameters measured by the auto tuning function are used to control the motor ENEMIES Tune selection Default E A b for information only cannot be modified Note Tune of the motor will increase significantly the performances Default A 5 The default values are used to control the motor NEA 5 Measure 5 The values measured by the auto tuning function are used to control the motor CUS Custom 1 5 The values set manually are used to control the motor 100 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting EUnU tuning usage Therm Mot This parameter shows the way used to modify the motor parameters according to its estimated thermal state n No D No thermal state estimation Therm Mot Statoric thermal state estimation based on nominal current and current consumed by the motor Cold tun Statoric thermal state estimation based on statoric resistance measured at the first cold tune and tune done at each power up Automatic autotune No 5 0 ADANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH When Automatic autotune L E is changed from No
335. t Not cont Non continuous mode Continuous F Continuous mode This option is not possible if Auto DC injection A d page 161 is Yes 5 or if Type of stop 5 E page 158 is Freewheel n 5E No F n O Function inactive This option is not possible if Brake assignment b L page 179 is not No D If Motor control type E page 92 is set to Sync 5 the Motor fluxing L U parameter causes the alignment of the rotor and not the fluxing If Brake assignment b L page 179 is not No O the Motor fluxing L parameter has no effect 96 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting HE E Motor param choice nPr MotPower n P COS Mot Cos L0 5 Mot Power n P 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped T 2s Tochange the assignment of this parameter press the ENT key for 2
336. t 1 IL 10 IL10 L 10 Function blocks Logical Input 10 F br FB start Function blocks Run mode IL On Delay 0 to 200 ms 0 ms This parameter is used to take account of the change of the logic input to state 1 with a delay that can be adjusted between 0 and 200 milliseconds in order to filter out possible interference The change to state 0 is taken into account without delay IROS INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG continued L LIx CONFIGURATION to All the logic inputs available on the drive are processed as in the example for LI1 above up to LI6 IL TES iL mc LA5 CONFIGURATION Specific parameters for LI5 used as a pulse input PENA RP assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions associated with the Pulse input in order to check for example for compatibility problems Identical to assignment A 1 A page 120 E RP min value 0 to 20 00 kHz 0 kHz Pulse input scaling parameter of 096 in Hz 10 unit Eie RP max value 0 to 20 00 kHz 20 00 kHz Pulse input scaling parameter of 100 in Hz 10 unit RP filter 0 to 1 000 ms 0 ms ext Pulse input cutoff time of the low filter CONFIGURATION The 2 analog inputs and AI2 on the drive could be used as LI inputs and are processed as the example for LI1 above These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can
337. t into account for the brake control sequence 0 0 The brake contact is not taken into account 1 The brake contact is taken into account If a logic input is assigned to the brake contact BRH b2 0 During the brake release sequence the reference is enabled at the end of the time Brake Release time During the brake engage sequence the current changes to 0 according to the ramp Current ramp time 5 r at the end of the Brake engage time b E BRH b2 4 H 2 1 When the brake is released the reference is enabled when the logic input changes to 1 When the brake is engaged the current changes to 0 according to the ramp Current ramp time 5 when the logic input changes to 0 Run command 11 Relay or 4 logic input Frequency 4 l Logic input Brake contact Frequency I4 rq s bir T b2 br 1 mr Current ramp time 0 to 5 00 s 0s BRH b2 bc 0 Torque current ramp time increase and decrease for a current variation equal to Brake release FW 5 r Q These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these
338. t range Factory setting ors F Id PID REGULATOR lt Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 147 PID feedback ass No D n E No O Not assigned A 1 AH 1 Analog input A1 12 AI2 12 Analog input A2 13 13 Analog input P RP P 1 Pulse input virtual 2 11 2 Virtual analog input 2 1 OA01 1 Function blocks Analog Output 01 HH OA10 10 Function blocks Analog Output 10 4 1 Way to access the parameters described in this page 5 Name of submenu on graphic display terminal 2 Submenu code on 4 digit 7 segment display 6 Name of parameter on graphic display terminal 3 Parameter code on 4 digit 7 segment display 7 Value of parameter on graphic display terminal 4 Parameter value on 4 digit 7 segment display Note The text in square brackets indicates what you will see on the graphic display terminal A menu followed by the mention continued appears sometimes to locate you in the structure Example APPLICATION FUNCT continued PID REGULATOR Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 147 In this case the mention continued indicates that the APPLICATION FUNCT submenu is above the PID REGULATOR submenu in the stru
339. t the thermal state estimation of the motor In any case the motor has to be stopped before performing a tune operation Cable length has an influence on the Tune result If the cabling is modified it is necessary to redo the tune operation No action O Auto tuning not in progress Do tune 5 Auto tuning is performed immediatly if possible then the parameter automatically changes to No action D If the drive state does not allow the tune operation immediately the parameter changes to No O and the operation must be done again Erase tune C L The motor parameters measured by the auto tuning function are reseted The default motor parameters values are used to control the motor Auto tuning status U 5 is set to Not done A b 5 EAb EIS rape Pie On fetal ie Auto tuning state Not done E H 5 for information only cannot be modified This parameter is not saved at drive power off It shows the Autotuning status since last power on Not done A b Autotune is not done Pending n d Autotune has been requested but not yet performed In Progress Autotune is in progress Failed F A 11 Autotune has detected a fault Done d O E The motor parameters measured by the auto tuning function are used to control the motor SEUn EUS Tune selection Default A b for information only ca
340. t to Level L E L see 2 3 wire control page 73 If the restart has not taken place once the configurable time has elapsed the procedure is aborted and the drive remains locked until it is turned off and then on again The fault codes which permit this function are listed on page 293 0 n E No 5 2 Function inactive HE 5 Yes 5 Automatic restart after locking in fault state if the detected fault has disappeared and the other operating conditions permit the restart The restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer waiting periods 1 s 5 s 10 s then 1 minute for the following attempts Max restart time 5 minutes 5 This parameter appears if Automatic restart is set to Yes 5 It can be used to limit the number of consecutive restarts on a recurrent detected fault 5 5 min 5 5 minutes 10 minutes O 10 minutes 30 30 minutes 90 30 minutes Ih 1 hour 5 1 hour 2 hours 2 4 2 hours 3h 3 hours 3 hours Unlimited Unlimited FAULT MANAGEMENT continued Sy ALARM SETTING TET Current threshold 0 to 1 5 In 1 INV Motor current threshold 1 2 15 02 Freq threshold 0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz Q Motor frequency threshold Freq threshold 2 0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz Motor frequency threshol
341. t use Use the jog dial to increment the character alphabetical order a too high multiplier and lt lt and gt gt F2 and F3 to switch to the next or previous 99 999 max display character respectively Term 0 0Hz 00 Term 0 0Hz 00 Customized Standard use of the factory set unit Once you have entered the unit if you press ENT the Ramp increment screen will re appear Nb characters max in order to display the name Press ESC to return to Unit Customized customization of the unit MA etc select from drop down list Term 0 0Hz 00 ENT Term 0 0Hz 00 LINE 2 For any service dial The message entered appears while the View key is pressed Nb characters max 23 Tem 30097 00A Names USER MENU NAME DRIVE NAME configuration serial no lines of messages USER MENU NAME names of units etc are customized as in the example of the parameter name shown opposite If no custom settings have been made the standard values appear names units etc FLOW REFERENCE Display on 1 or 2 lines of characters Use F1 to change to ABC abc 123 Use the jog dial to increment the character alphabetical order and lt lt and gt gt F2 and F3 to switch to the next or previous character respectively Nb characters max 18 270 1 28692 03 2010 Interface ItF Code Ir fm Name Description U
342. t when the motor changes Automatically each time the motor is activated for the 18 time after switching on the drive if the Automatic autotune parameter on page 96 is set to Yes 5 Motor thermal states in multimotor mode The drive helps to protect the three motors individually Each thermal state takes into account all stop times if the drive power is not switched off 51 28692 03 2010 219 Configuration Mode ConF Configuration information output CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR The motor thermal state of each motor is not memorized when power is switched off To continue to protect the motors it is required to Perform auto tuning on each motor every time the power is switched on or Use an external overload protection on each motor Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage In the INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG O menu a logic output can be assigned to each configuration or motor 2 or 3 for remote information transmission Note As the INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG O menu is switched these outputs must be assigned in all configurations in which information is required Code Ie IHE Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting APPLICATION FUNCT continued MULTIMOTORS CONFIG nl LITERE No a 0 Multimotors CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR When Mult
343. tage 51 28692 03 2010 61 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Name Description Unit MORE FAULT INFO Additional detected fault information IE ri fe Network fault Communication option card fault code This parameter is read only The fault code remains saved in the parameter even if the cause disappears The parameter is reset after the drive is disconnected and then reconnected The values of this parameter depend on the network card Consult the manual for the corresponding card ILF I Internal link fault 1 Communication interruption between option card 1 and drive This parameter is read only The fault code remains saved in the parameter even if the cause disappears The parameter is reset after the drive is disconnected and then reconnected Himla DIAGNOSTICS continued IGBT alarm counter Transistor alarm time counter length of time the IGBT temperature alarm has been active 5Er SERVICE MESSAGE See page 271 Min freq time Transistor alarm time counter at minimum switching frequency length of time the IGBT temperature alarm has been active after the drive has automatically reduced the switching frequency to the minimum value rFLE Reset past faults Reset all resetable previous detected faults n O o O Reset not active 5 YES 4 E 5 Reset in progress 62 S1A28692 03 2010 Mon
344. tain 16 speeds you must also configure 2 4 and 8 speeds E Preset speed 2 0 to 599 Hz 10 Hz Preset speed 2 See the Combination table for preset PID references page 192 Q 1 Preset speed 3 0 to 599 Hz 15Hz Preset speed 3 See the Combination table for preset PID references page 192 Q 1 Preset speed 4 0 to 599 Hz 20 Hz Preset speed 4 See the Combination table for preset PID references page 192 Q 1 ep B Preset speed 5 0 to 599 Hz 25 Hz Preset speed 5 See the Combination table for preset PID references page 192 1 Preset speed 6 0 to 599 Hz 30 Hz Preset speed 6 See the Combination table for preset PID references page 192 1 Preset speed 7 0 to 599 Hz 35 Hz Preset speed 7 See the Combination table for preset PID references page 192 Q 1 166 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Q 1 Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Preset speed 8 0 to 599 Hz 40 Hz Preset speed 8 See the Combination table for preset PID references page 192 Q 1 Preset speed 9 0 to 599 Hz 45 Hz Preset speed 9 See the Combination table for preset PID references page 192 1 SP IO
345. ter Ref 2 switching The black square represents the factory setting assignment Fr T SHsgs amp H3 dHe dHs fme quaa Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Fr 5 and Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Fr Ib for 5 Terminals only accessible if F terminals Fg Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card and speed Note Ref 1B channel F 5 and Ref 1B switching C 5 must be configured in the APPLICATION FUNCT u n menu 132 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Reference channel for Not separ 5 Separate 5 and I O profile 5 configurations PID configured with PID references at the terminals Ref 1B switching Ref 1 channel THe FRA Ref 1B channel Summing ref 2 Summing ref 3 5 A 3 Subtract ref 2 Subtract ref 3 Note Forced local is not active in I O profile e 2 PID i See page 192 AI3 5 a Graphic display terminal N lt T lt LL High speed HSP ACC DEC _ FrH Pad rFr sp AC2 DE2 Channel 2 _ Low speed Ramps 1 Channel 1 Ref 2 channel
346. ter Number of CRC errors COMMUNICATION MAP continued COM SCANNER INPUT MAP Used for CANopen and Modbus Network Com Scan In1 val Value of the 1st input word Com Scan In2 val Value of the 2nd input word Com Scan In3 val Value of the 3rd input word Com Scan In4 val Value of the 4th input word Com Scan In5 val Value of the 5th input word Com Scan In6 val Value of the 6th input word Com Scan In7 val Value of the 7th input word Com Scan In8 val Value of the 8th input word 1 28692 03 2010 Monitoring Mode MOn Code Name Description Unit CAN COMMUNICATION MAP continued OSA COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP Com Scan Out1 val Value of the 1st output word c Com Scan Out2 val Value of the 2nd output word mb 8 Com Scan Outs val Value of the 3rd output word in RET Com Scan Out4 val Value of the 4th output word mle 5 Com Scan Out5 val Value of the 5th output word Com Scan Out6 Value of the 6th output word mite Com Scan Out Value of the 7th output word ae Com Scan Out8 val Value of the 8th output word COMMUNICATION MAP continued CMD WORD IMAGE Command word image Only accessible via graphic display terminal Modbus Modbus command word image CANopen CANopen command word image
347. ter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 7 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 Parameter 1 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 7 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 Parameter 1 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 7 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 2 Parameter 2 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 3 Parameter 3 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Parameter 4 Parameter 4 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 7 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 3 values Input LI or bit or frequency threshold 0 1 Oor 1 2 values Input LI or bit or frequency threshold 0 0 1 Note Do not modify the parameters in the SETTINGS 5 menu because any modifications made in this menu SETTINGS 5 will be lost on the next power up The parameters be adjusted during operation in the PARAM SET SWITCHING menu on the active configuration Note Parameter set switching cannot be configured from the integrated display terminal Parameters can only be adjusted on the integrated display terminal if the function has been configured previously via the graphic display terminal by PC Software o
348. the bit changes to 0 If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active the motor will only restart if 2 3 wire control page 73 is set to 2 wire 2 and if 2 wire type E is set to Level L E L or Fwd priority If not a new run command must be sent n E No 0 Not assigned L I L LI I Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 138 Fast stop assign No n 0 The stop is activated when the input changes to 0 or the bit changes to 1 bit in I O profile 7 at 0 If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active the motor will only restart if 2 3 wire control page 73 is set to 2 wire 2 and if 2 wire type C E is set to Level L E L or Fwd priority P F 0 If not a new run command must be sent Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 148 n E No a O Not assigned L I L LIT 1 Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 138 Ramp divider 0 to 10 4 This parameter can be accessed if Type of stop 5 E issetto Fast stop 5 E and if Fast stop assign F 5 is not No n 5 and if Stop type 5 is set to Fast stop F 5E Q The ramp that is enabled Deceleration d or Deceleration 2 d E is then divided by this coefficient when stop requests are s
349. the configuration of high speed hoisting Speed reference mode High speed hoisting 5 page 190 is set to Speed ref 5 5 0 Torque variation detection During high speed operation the load is compared to that measured during the speed step The permissible load variation and its duration can be configured If exceeded the drive switches to fault mode Current limitation mode High speed hoisting H 5 O page 190 is set to Current Limit 5 D On ascend during high speed operation an increase in load will result in a drop in speed Even if high speed operation has been activated if the motor frequency drops below the I Limit Frequency 5 L threshold page 190 the drive will switch to fault mode The detection is realised only for a positive variation of the load and only in the high speed area area upper to I Limit Frequency 5 L On descend operation takes the form of Speed reference mode Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting ER b FAULT MANAGEMENT continued a id DYNAMIC LOAD DETECT Load variation detection This can be accessed if High speed hoisting H 5 7 page 190 is not No 5 D fe fb cal Dynamic load time No 5 D Activation of load variation detection and adjustment of time delay for taking load variation detected fault Dynamic load fault 91 into account n E No 5 No load variation detection 0 00 s to 10 00 s Adjustment of the
350. time delay for taking detected fault into account dLd Dynamic load threshold 1 to 10096 10096 Adjustment of the trip threshold for load variation detection as a 9o of the load measured during the speed step dL b Dyn load Mgt Freewheel 5 Behavior of the drive in the event of a load variation detected fault n 0 Ignore 2 Detected fault ignored YE 5 Freewheel 4 E 5 Freewheel stop SEE STT 5 E Stop according to configuration of Type of stop 5 page 158 without tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel for example according to 2 3 wire control and 2 wire type page 112 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop L F F Fallback spd L Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 r L 5 Spd L 5 The drive maintains the speed at the time the detected fault occurred as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop Stop on ramp F SE Fast stop 5 E Fast stop 248 1 28692 03 2010 Conf
351. ting br HO BRH b0 0 Selection of the brake restart sequence if a run command is repeated while the brake is engaging H 0 0 The engage release sequence is completely executed 1 The brake is released immediately A run command may be requested during the brake engagement phase Whether or not the brake release sequence is executed depends on the value selected for b0 5 Run command Frequency 4 b0 bc 0 logic input 5 Relay or 4 d 1 Injection Frequency bEn b0 b 1 Relay or 4 logic input Note If a run command is requested during the ttr phase the complete brake control sequence is initialized BRH b1 0 Deactivation of the brake contact in steady state fault H 0 0 The brake contact in steady state fault is active fault state if the contact is open during operation The Brake feedback 4 F brake contact fault is monitored in all operating phases 1 1 The brake contact in steady state fault is inactive The Brake feedback b brake contact fault is only monitored during the brake release and engage phases 182 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting br H2 b2 0 Taking the brake contac
352. tion or when stopped 51 28692 03 2010 275 Interface ItF 276 1 28692 03 2010 Open Save as trA Open Save as trA This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 IDENTIFICATION ENT 3 INTERFACE 4 OPEN SAVE AS 5 PASSWORD Code Quick 4 1 OPEN To download one of the 4 files from the graphic display terminal to the drive 51 28692 03 2010 277 Open Save as trA 4 2 SAVE AS To download the current drive configuration to the graphic display terminal RDY Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A 4 OPEN SAVE AS 4 1 OPEN 4 2 SAVE AS Code lt lt gt gt Quick ENT RDY Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A 4 1 OPEN ENT ROY Term 00Hz 00 See details on the File 1 Used DOWNLOAD GROUP next page Drive configuration Motor parameters Communication Code Quick Note Opening an empty file has no effect Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A DOWNLOAD PLEASE CHECK THAT THE DRIVE WIRING IS OK ESC abort ENT continue Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A 4 2 SAVE AS Used Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A Free DOWNLOAD TRANSFER IN PROGRESS Saving to a used file deletes and replaces the configuration contained in this file Term 0 0 Hz 0 0A DOWNLOAD DONE ENT or ESC to continue Various messages may appear when the download is requested TRANSFER IN PROGRESS DONE Error messages if download not po
353. tions given page 238 Check and optimize the following parameters IR compensation page 78 Rated motor volt Un 5 and Rated mot current n page 74 and perform Auto tuning U n page 75 5 Mains overvoltage Line voltage too high Check the line voltage Disturbed mains supply 16 lt overheat Overheating of PTC probes detected Check the motor load and motor size on input LI6 Check the motor ventilation Wait for the motor to cool before restarting Check the type and state of the PTC probes PEFL LI6 PTC probe PTC probe on input LI6 open or Check the PTC probe and the wiring between it and the short circuited motor drive SE IP IGBT short circuit Power component detected fault Contact Schneider Electric Product Support S FS _ Motor short circuit Short circuit at drive output Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor and the motor s insulation Contact Schneider Electric Product Support SLF Modbus e Communication interruption on the Check the communication bus Modbus bus Check the time out Refer to the Modbus User s manual y de fe PC com Communication interruption with PC Check the PC Software connecting cable Software Check the time out 51 com Communication interruption with the Check the terminal connection graphic display terminal or remote Check the time out dis
354. to No D if the brake logic control Brake assignment b L is assigned page 179 The function is incompatible with applications requiring Positioning on a ramp The use of a braking resistor the resistor would not operate correctly No O Function inactive Yes 5 Function active for applications that do not require strong deceleration The following selections appear depending on the rating of the drive and Motor control type page 92 They enable stronger deceleration to be obtained than with Yes 5 Use comparative testing to determine your selection High torq A d 4 n A Addition of a constant current flow component When Dec ramp adapt 5 is configured on High torq x d nx the dynamic performances for braking are improved by the addition of a current flow component The aim is to increase the iron loss and magnetic energy stored in the motor 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the SETTINGS 5 menu 2 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6 000 s according to Ramp increment r page 155 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified durin
355. to 0 To have repeatability in ramps the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application See Deceleration 9 page 155 ARE Acceleration 2 0 00 to 6 000 s 1 5s Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq F 5 page 74 To have repeatability in ramps the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application See Acceleration 2 A 2 page 156 ENG Deceleration 2 0 00 to 6 000 s 1 5s Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq 5 page 74 to 0 To have repeatability in ramps the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application See Deceleration 2 d 2 page 156 fe fal di Begin Acc round 0 to 10096 1096 Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as a of the Acceleration or Acceleration 2 A 2 ramp time Visible if Ramp type P E is set to Customized U 5 See Begin Acc round 1 page 155 ERE End Acc round 0 to 100 1096 Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a of the Acceleration A or Acceleration 2 A 2 ramp time be set between 0 and 100 Begin Acc round 1 Q Visible if Ramp type is set to Customized 1 5 See End Acc round A 2 page 156 Begin Dec round 0 to 10096 1096 Rounding of start of deceleration ramp as a of the Deceleration 9 E or Deceleration 2 d E 2 ramp time Visi
356. to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Maximum injection time DC inject level 2 d 2 for injection selected as stop mode only This parameter can be accessed if Type of stop 5 is set to DC injection dL 1 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the SETTINGS 5 and APPLICATION FUNCT U n menus 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate 3 These settings are independent of the AUTO DC INJECTION A d E function These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 51 28692 03 2010 255 Configuration Mode ConF Communication With integrated display terminal From On F menu _ Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FULL continued COnN COMMUNICATION IESE COM SCANNER INPUT Scan IN1 address 7 5 to Scan IN4 address could be used for Fast Task of the communication scanner see Modbus amp CANopen communication manual Scan IN1 address
357. to forward slowdown if this rising edge occurs in forward operation The slowdown command is then memorized even in the event of a power outage Operation in the opposite direction is authorized at high speed The slowdown command is deleted on a falling edge change from 1 to 0 of the input or bit assigned to forward slowdown if this falling edge occurs in reverse operation A bit or a logic input can be assigned to disable this function Although forward slowdown is disabled while the disable input or bit is at 1 sensor changes continue to be monitored and saved Example Positioning on a limit switch on rising edge ji T Ae T O O O O Reverse Reverse E Forward Forward M orwar slowdown sto stop slowdown p N Operation with short cams A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL When operating for the first time or after restoring the factory settings the drive must initially be started outside the slowdown and stop zones in order to initialize the function Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL The current zone is memorized at power off In case of manual modification of the system position the drive must be started at the same position at the next power up of the drive Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage In this instance when operatin
358. to its upper limit The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value Parameter assigned 4 Upper limit Lower limit Parameter assigned Upper limit Lower limit Current voltage Min Output Max Output 20 mA output ADLXOr RU Hx or or 01 UD Hx 10V 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Current or Max Output Min Output 20 mA 15 RULxor or U D Hx UOLx 10 V 51 28692 03 2010 127 Configuration Mode ConF Scaling of the assigned parameter The scale of the assigned parameter can be adapted in accordance with requirements by modifying the values of the lower and upper limits by means of two parameters for each analog output These parameters are given in 100 corresponds to the total variation range of the configured parameter So 100 upper limit lower limit For example Sign torque 5 9 which varies between 3 and 3 times the rated torque 100 corresponds to 6 times the rated torque The Scaling AOx min 5 L x parameter modifies the lower limit new value lower limit range ASLx The value 0 factory setting does not modify the lower limit The Scaling AOx max 5 Hx parameter modifies the upper limit new value lower limit range x ASLx The value 100 factory setting does not modify the upper limit Scaling AOx min 5 L x must always be lower than
359. to man speed Speed reference of the regulator predictive reference 5H 3 Summing ref 3 5 3 Summing reference Fr Ib Ref 1B channel F Ib Reference source 1B dA J Subtract ref 3 d A 3 Subtracting reference F LOC Forced local L Forced local reference source Ref 2 multiplier A 2 Multiplying reference 2 3 Ref 3 multiplier 3 Multiplying reference 3 Weight input 5 External weight measurement function IHU 01 IRE 1 Functions blocks Analog Input 01 IH 10 10 H Functions blocks Analog Input 10 U IL 1 min value V Voltage scaling parameter of 096 U IH I max value V Voltage scaling parameter of 100 A IIF filter 5 Interference filtering cut off time of the low filter A IRA ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE continued Analog input functions In A12 V AI2 customer image Value of analog input 2 A IgA Al2 assignment Al2 functions assignment If no functions have been assigned No is displayed Following parameters are visible on the graphic display terminal by pressing the ENT key on the parameter Identical to assignment A A page 46 2 min value V Voltage scaling parameter of 096 AI2 max value V Voltage scaling parameter of 100 A filter 5
360. to tuning usage L is set to Cold tun The value of motor statoric resistance measured during the tune is used to estimate the thermal state of the motor at power up No O Function deactivated Yes 5 A tune is automatically done at each power up FLU 0 1 Eak EIRE Motor fluxing No F ADANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH When Motor fluxing F L is set to Continuous F the drive automatically builds up flux Check this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage If Motor control type E page 92 is set to Sync 5 the factory setting is replaced by Not cont F n E In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the motor In Continuous mode the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up In Not cont n mode fluxing occurs when the motor starts up The flux current is greater than Rated mot current C configured rated motor current when the flux is established and is then adjusted to the motor magnetizing curren
361. tor error monitoring threshold Q 1 Ie PID integral reset No n 0 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the function is inactive the PID integral is enabled If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the function is active the PID integral is disabled n O n O Not assigned 1 L I I LH 1 Logical input LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 138 PIP 1 Speed ref assign No n 0 PID regulator predictive speed input n E No O Not assigned A 1 I 1 Analog input A1 12 AI2 A 12 Analog input A2 13 AI3 3 Analog input L E E HMI Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal source Modbus 7 d b Integrated Modbus Hn CANopen A n Integrated CANopen n card 5 Communication option board source P 1 1 Pulse input A IU 1 Al virtual 1 1 Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial I OAO01 HH H I Function blocks Analog Output 01 HH OA10 0A 10 Function blocks Analog Output 10 ip yr Speed input 1 to 10096 10096 Multiplying coefficient for predictive speed input This parameter cannot be accessed if Speed ref assign is set to No 5 O 1 EIR Auto Manual assign 0 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the PID is active If the assigned input
362. tor freq 10 to 800 Hz 50 Hz This parameter cannot be accessed if Motor control type page 92 is set to Sync 5 Rated motor frequency given on the nameplate The factory setting is 50 Hz or preset to 60 Hz if Standard mot freq 5 F is set to 60 Hz Rated motor speed 0 to 65 535 rpm According to drive rating This parameter cannot be accessed if Motor control type page 92 is set to Sync 5 0 to 9 999 rpm then 10 00 to 65 53 krpm on the integrated display terminal If rather than the rated speed the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a 96 calculate the rated speed as follows eli 0 Nominal speed Synchronous speed x one Nominal speed Synchronous speed x eee 50 Hz motors or Nominal speed Synchronous speed x DIE 60 Hz motors 94 S1A28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting EUn Auto tuning No 0 Q nl Bite ENT ADANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR ARC FLASH During auto tuning the motor operates at rated current Do not service the motor during auto tuning Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL It is essential that the following parameters Rated motor volt 5 Rated motor freq 5 Rated mot current
363. tor voltage P I RP P 1 Pulse input A IU 1 Al virtual 1 A 1 Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial dQ I DO1 HH 1 Analog logical output DO1 Al virtual 2 Virtual analog input 2 by the communication bus 1 OA01 UHR TZ 1 Function blocks Analog Output 01 OA10 OA 10 Function blocks Analog Output 10 IH Analog input x assignment n 2 All the Function blocks analog inputs available on the drive are processed as in the example for 011 5 O 1 above up to 10 A FUNCTION BLOCKS continued ADL CONTAINERS ADL containers contain Modbus logical adress of internal parameters of the drive If the chosen adress is valid the display shows the parameter name instead of the adress LADO 1 ADL Container 01 3 015 to 64 299 0 LAQe ADL Container 02 3 015 to 64 299 0 ADL Container 03 3 015 to 64 299 0 ADL Container 04 3 015 to 64 299 0 LADS ADL Container 05 3 015 to 64 299 0 ADL Container 06 3 015 to 64 299 0 LHRU 1 ADL Container 07 3 015 to 64 299 0 ADL Container 08 3 015 to 64 299 0 51 28692 03 2010 145 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting P siti FUNCTION BLOCKS continued EET FB PAR
364. tting INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG continued VIRTUAL AI2 AIV2 assignment Possible assignments for Al virtual 2 L 2 Virtual analog input 2 via communication channel to be configured with 12 net channel C 2 Identical to AIV1 assignment A U page 121 Ia dE re nU Ndb CAn Al2 net Channel No 0 VIRTUAL 2 A U 2 source channel This parameter can also be accessed in the PID REGULATOR P d submenu page 196 Scale The value 8192 transmitted by this input is equivalent to 10 V on a 10 V input No O Not assigned Modbus 7 d b Integrated Modbus CANopen A n Integrated CANopen Com card E Communication card if inserted These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 122 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Name Description INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG continued R1 CONFIGURATION Adjustment range Factory setting nl IINE ln FLH ic f dsl Sire In ETE OLA eere sl EEHH re ta ESIE EISA 5 IE roe dn E roule ful
365. tuning Special motor or motor whose power is Check that the motor drive are compatible not suitable for the drive Motor not connected to the drive Check that the motor is present during auto tuning If an output contactor is being used close it during auto tuning Motor not stopped Check that the motor is stopped during tune operation 292 51 28692 03 2010 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Fault detection codes that can be cleared with the automatic restart function after the cause has disappeared These detected faults can also be cleared by turning on and off or by means of a logic input or control bit Fault reset 5 F parameter page 232 Detected Fault Name Probable cause Remedy EIS Brake control Brake release current not reached Check the drive motor connection Check the motor windings Check the Brake release FW b and Brake release Rev d settings page 179 Brake engage frequency threshold Apply the recommended settings for Brake engage freq 5 E only Brake engage freq b E n regulated when brake logic control is assigned tr Com network Communication interruption on Check the environment electromagnetic compatibility communication card Check the wiring Check the time out Replace the option card Contact Schneider Electric Product Support CANopen Communicat
366. uctions can result in equipment damage It is recommended to do the following in order to optimize continuity of operation Environment Part concerned Action Periodicity Knock on the product Housing control block Check the drive visual aspect At least each year led display Corrosion Terminals connector screws Inspect and clean if required EMC plate Dust Terminals fans blowholes Temperature Around the product Check and correct if required Cooling Fan Check the fan operation Replace the fan After 3 to 5 years depending on the operating conditions Vibration Terminal connections Check tightening at recom least each year mended torque Note The fan operation depends on the drive thermal state The drive may be running and the fan not Spares and repairs Serviceable product Please refer to your Customer Care Centre Long time storage The product capacitor performances after a long time storage above 2 years can be degraded See page 10 Fan replacement It is possible to order a new fan for the ATV32 maintenance see the commercial references on www schneider electric com Please refer to Installation manual to replace the fan 51 28692 03 2010 287 Maintenance 288 1 28692 03 2010 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Diagnostics and Troubleshooting What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics
367. ucture of the parameter cece eee eee eee eee ee eee 31 Finding a parameter in this document 32 Description of the HMI noeh wn e nonum ncn 33 Structure of the 34 Programming ts IRR ER E tee ee ee eee tees ER a RR Se 35 Chapter 3 Reference Mode Sh ees Baa 37 Introductions as LEER 38 Organization tee x uv cre dos ah ata ee ola Aa bo oe P OR RR 39 Men 40 Chapter 4 Monitoring Mode 41 ET 42 Organizallor tree eed TR 43 PET 44 MONIT MOTOR ases ce breiter Pe 44 Am aee ive Wise etr ed 45 en as rece Lisa ctu 48 MONIT EUN BLOCKS 2 ecce zr rotten Erreur aee ee Erreur ce nhan rtr DER ceeseeee 49 COMMUNICATION 22222 2322 32 222 52 13 rei 50 Te SD RENNES POURRAI Cw eect essences 56 BROWER TIME cde E 56 DABAT eT RE 57 POT RUG PATE escis viris En DEMO rr CERCHI Arme
368. ue lim 41 Torque limit between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque dO 1 901 dH 1 Assignment to a logic output This assignment can only appear if DO1 assignment d O has been assigned This is the only possible choice in this case and is only displayed for informational purposes E 9115 Torque 4Q 9 15 Signed motor torque between 3 and 3 times the rated motor torque The sign and the sign correspond to the physical direction of the torque regardless of mode motor or generator I OA01 HR HE 1 Function blocks Analog Output 01 HH 1 10 OA 10 Function blocks Analog Output 10 MATE AO1 Type Current 5 A 10 U Voltage O L Voltage output Current Current output AOL I AO1 min Output 0 to 20 0 mA 0 mA This parameter can be accessed if AO1 Type is set to Current AGH I AO1 max Output 0 to 20 0 mA 20 0 mA This parameter can be accessed if AO1 Type is set to Current 5 UOL I AO1 min Output 0 to 10 0 V OV This parameter can be accessed if AO1 Type set to Voltage B U 1 max Output 0 to 10 0 V 10 0 V This parameter be accessed if AO1 Type set to Voltage O U ASL Scaling AO1 min 0 to 100 096 096 Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter as a of the maximum possible variation ASH
369. ularly in the case of permanent magnet synchronous motors which are susceptible to demagnetization o Check that the profile mission complies with the derating curve given in the installation manual Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Used to limit the motor current See page 204 Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss J P L fault mode if this has been enabled see page 238 If it is less than the no load motor current the motor cannot run 82 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting ILimit 2 value 0 to 1 5 In 1 1 5 In 1 RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR AND THE DRIVE Check that the motor will withstand this current particularly in the case of permanent magnet synchronous motors which are susceptible to demagnetization Check that the profile mission complies with the derating curve given in the installation manual Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage See page 204 Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss JJ P L fault mode if this has been enabled see page 238 If it is less than the no load motor current the motor cannot run fe fb fU Motor fluxing No ADANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH When
370. ult mode on power up If the card has been deliberately changed or removed the detected fault can be cleared by pressing the ENT key twice which causes the factory settings to be restored see page 69 for the parameter groups affected by the card These are as follows Card replaced by a card of the same type Communication cards only the parameters that are specific to communication cards Control block changed When a control block is replaced by a control block configured on a drive with a different rating the drive locks in Incorrect config F F fault mode on power up If the control block has been deliberately changed the detected fault can be cleared by pressing the ENT key twice which causes all the factory settings to be restored 51 28692 03 2010 295 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Fault detection codes displayed on the remote display terminal Code Name Description In IE Initialization in The microcontroller is initializing progress Search underway for communication configuration Communication error Time out detected fault 50 ms 1 This message is displayed after 20 attempts at communication RA 11 Alarm button A key has been held down for more than 10 seconds 1 The keypad is disconnected The keypad wakes up when a key is pressed ELr Confirmation of This is displayed when the STOP key is pressed once if the active command channel
371. ult mode if this has been enabled see Output Phase Loss O L page 238 If it is less than the no load motor current the motor cannot run ILE Current limitation 0 to 1 5 In 1 1 5 In 1 RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR AND THE DRIVE Check that the motor will withstand this current particularly in the case of permanent magnet synchronous motors which are susceptible to demagnetization Check that the profile mission complies with the derating curve given in the installation manual Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage First current limitation This parameter be accessed if Current limit 2 L Z is not set to No O The adjustment range is limited to 1 5 In Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss D P L fault mode if this has been enabled see Output Phase Loss 0 L page 238 If it is less than the no load motor current the motor cannot run 1 corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 204
372. ut Predictive speed reference Speed ref assign AM 1 Analog input AI2 2 Analog input AI3 A 13 Analog input RP P Pulse input HMI L Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal e Modbus d b Integrated Modbus CANopen n Integrated CANopen card E Communication card if inserted Setting up the PID regulator 1 Configuration in PID mode See the diagram on page 192 2 Perform a test in factory settings mode To optimize the drive adjust PID prop gain 5 PID integral 5 gradually and independently and observe the effect on the PID feedback in relation to the reference 3 If the factory settings are unstable or the reference is incorrect Perform a test with a speed reference in Manual mode without PID regulator and with the drive on load for the speed range of the system In steady state the speed must be stable and comply with the reference and the PID feedback signal must be stable In transient state the speed must follow the ramp and stabilize quickly and the PID feedback must follow the speed If this is not the case see the settings for the drive and or sensor signal and wiring Switch to PID mode Set Dec ramp adapt 5 A to No 5 5 no auto adaptation of the ramp Set PID ramp to the minimum permitted by the mechanism without triggering an Ov
373. ype of card for all cards The software version for the control block the communication cards The serial number for the control block Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting FAULT MANAGEMENT continued 2712 CARDS PAIRING ie n Pairing password OFF F to9 999 OFF The OFF value signifies that the card pairing function is inactive The ON value signifies that card pairing is active and that an access code must be entered in order to start the drive in the event of a card pairing detected fault As soon as the code has been entered the drive is unlocked and the code changes to ON The PPI code is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 250 1 28692 03 2010 Configuration Mode ConF Process underload detected fault A process underload is detected when the next event occurs and remains pending for a minimum time Unid Time Detect 1 1 which is configurable The motor is in steady state and the torque is below the set underload limit Unld Thr 0 Speed L UL Unld Thr Nom Speed

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  法人様向けDL みず工房スタンダード取扱説明書  User Manual - eCM-BF609  Targus 17" Widescreen notebook privacy filter  PIC-USB40 User Manual  North Star GM9571M GPS Receiver User Manual  Air Blower para banheira de hidromassagem  Home Decorators Collection 47HF100GRG Instructions / Assembly  Instruction Manual - Davis Instruments  Use & Operation Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file